SIMATIC Sensors RFID systems MOBY D
SIMATIC Sensors
System Manual · 01/2010
MOBY D
RFID SYSTEMS
Answers for industry.
Introduction 1
Safety
information/instructions
2
System overview
3
Planning the MOBY D
system
4
Mobile data storage units
5
Write/read devices with
RS232 interface
6
Write/read devices with
RS422 interface
7
Antennas
8
System integration
9
Accessories
10
Alarm, error and system
messages
11
Troubleshooting/FAQ
12
Certificates and approvals
A
Service & Support
B
Previous versions
C
List of abbreviations
D
SIMATIC Sensors
RFID systems
MOBY D
System Manual
01/2010
J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific task, in particular its warning notices and
safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of
identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Ⓟ 01/2010
Copyright © Siemens AG 2010 .
Technical data subject to change
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 5
Table of contents
1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................. 13
1.1 Preface.........................................................................................................................................13
1.2 Navigating in the system manual.................................................................................................15
1.3 Overview ......................................................................................................................................16
1.4 Main applications .........................................................................................................................17
2 Safety information/instructions................................................................................................................. 19
2.1 General safety instructions ..........................................................................................................19
3 System overview...................................................................................................................................... 21
3.1 System overview for MOBY D .....................................................................................................21
4 Planning the MOBY D system ................................................................................................................. 25
4.1 Fundamentals of application planning .........................................................................................25
4.1.1 Transmission window and read/write distance ............................................................................25
4.1.2 Width of the transmission window................................................................................................27
4.1.3 Transmission window with auxiliary fields ...................................................................................27
4.1.4 Permissible directions of motion of the MDS ...............................................................................29
4.1.5 Operation in static and dynamic mode ........................................................................................30
4.1.6 Communication between ASM, write/read device and MDS.......................................................31
4.1.7 Tolerance of tracking of pallet......................................................................................................32
4.2 Field data .....................................................................................................................................33
4.2.1 Field data for MDS and SLG........................................................................................................33
4.2.2 Minimum spacing .........................................................................................................................37
4.3 Installation guidelines...................................................................................................................38
4.3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................38
4.3.2 Permissible mounting material.....................................................................................................38
4.3.3 Metal-free area.............................................................................................................................40
4.3.4 Influences affecting the transmission window..............................................................................43
4.3.4.1 MDS in metal-free environment ...................................................................................................49
4.3.4.2 MDS in the vicinity of metal..........................................................................................................50
4.3.5 Reduction of interference due to metal........................................................................................51
4.3.6 Mounting of multiple antennas on or between metal frames.......................................................53
4.3.7 Installation and interconnection of 2, 3 or 4 MOBY D antennas to one SLG D10/D10S
write/read device..........................................................................................................................54
4.4 Chemical resistance of the MDS..................................................................................................61
4.5 EMC Guidelines ...........................................................................................................................68
4.5.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................68
4.5.2 What does EMC mean?...............................................................................................................69
4.5.3 Basic rules....................................................................................................................................70
4.5.4 Propagation of electromagnetic interference...............................................................................71
4.5.5 Cabinet configuration ...................................................................................................................75
4.5.6 Prevention of interference sources ..............................................................................................78
4.5.7 Equipotential bonding ..................................................................................................................79
4.5.8 Ground-fault monitoring with MOBY ............................................................................................80
Table of contents
MOBY D
6 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
4.5.9 Cable shielding............................................................................................................................ 81
4.6 MOBY shield concept.................................................................................................................. 83
4.7 Cable and connector assignment ............................................................................................... 85
4.7.1 Cable configuration ..................................................................................................................... 85
4.7.2 Connector pin assignment for SLG D1x (RS232)....................................................................... 86
4.7.3 Connector pin assignment for D1xS (RS422)............................................................................. 88
4.7.4 Connecting cable ........................................................................................................................ 90
5 Mobile data storage units......................................................................................................................... 95
5.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 95
5.2 Memory configuration of the ISO tags ........................................................................................ 98
5.3 MDS D100................................................................................................................................... 99
5.3.1 Characteristics ............................................................................................................................ 99
5.3.2 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................. 99
5.3.3 Metal-free area............................................................................................................................ 99
5.3.4 Mounting options....................................................................................................................... 101
5.3.5 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 104
5.3.6 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 105
5.4 MDS D124................................................................................................................................. 106
5.4.1 Characteristics .......................................................................................................................... 106
5.4.2 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 106
5.4.3 Mounting on metal..................................................................................................................... 106
5.4.4 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 108
5.4.5 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 109
5.5 MDS D139................................................................................................................................. 110
5.5.1 Characteristics .......................................................................................................................... 110
5.5.2 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 110
5.5.3 Mounting on metal..................................................................................................................... 111
5.5.4 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 113
5.5.5 Use of the MDS D139 in potentially explosive environments ................................................... 114
5.5.6 Dimensional drawing................................................................................................................. 116
5.5.7 Cleaning the mobile data memory ............................................................................................ 116
5.6 MDS D160................................................................................................................................. 117
5.6.1 Characteristics .......................................................................................................................... 117
5.6.2 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 117
5.6.3 Mounting on metal..................................................................................................................... 118
5.6.4 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 119
5.6.5 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 120
5.7 MDS D165................................................................................................................................. 121
5.7.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 121
5.7.2 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 121
5.7.3 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 122
5.7.4 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 123
5.8 MDS D200................................................................................................................................. 124
5.8.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 124
5.8.2 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 124
5.8.3 Mounting on metal..................................................................................................................... 125
5.8.4 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 127
5.8.5 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 128
5.9 MDS D261................................................................................................................................. 129
Table of contents
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 7
5.9.1 Features.....................................................................................................................................129
5.9.2 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................129
5.9.3 Technical data............................................................................................................................130
5.9.4 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................131
5.10 MDS D324..................................................................................................................................132
5.10.1 Characteristics ...........................................................................................................................132
5.10.2 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................132
5.10.3 Metal-free area...........................................................................................................................133
5.10.4 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................134
5.10.5 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................135
5.11 MDS D424..................................................................................................................................136
5.11.1 Characteristics ...........................................................................................................................136
5.11.2 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................136
5.11.3 Mounting on metal .....................................................................................................................136
5.11.4 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................138
5.11.5 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................139
5.12 MDS D428..................................................................................................................................140
5.12.1 Characteristics ...........................................................................................................................140
5.12.2 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................140
5.12.3 Application example of MDS D428 ............................................................................................141
5.12.4 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................142
5.12.5 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................143
5.13 MDS D460..................................................................................................................................144
5.13.1 Characteristics ...........................................................................................................................144
5.13.2 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................144
5.13.3 Mounting on metal .....................................................................................................................145
5.13.4 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................146
5.13.5 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................147
6 Write/read devices with RS232 interface ............................................................................................... 149
6.1 Overview of SLG with RS 232 serial interface...........................................................................149
6.2 SLG D10 basic unit ....................................................................................................................153
6.2.1 Features .....................................................................................................................................153
6.2.2 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................153
6.2.3 Technical data............................................................................................................................154
6.2.4 FCC information.........................................................................................................................155
6.2.5 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................156
6.3 SLG D11 basic unit ....................................................................................................................157
6.3.1 Features.....................................................................................................................................157
6.3.2 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................157
6.3.3 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................158
6.3.4 FCC information.........................................................................................................................159
6.3.5 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................160
6.4 SLG D12 ....................................................................................................................................161
6.4.1 Features.....................................................................................................................................161
6.4.2 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................161
6.4.3 Technical data............................................................................................................................162
6.4.4 FCC information.........................................................................................................................163
6.4.5 Transmission window.................................................................................................................164
6.4.6 Secondary fields ........................................................................................................................165
6.4.7 Influence of metal.......................................................................................................................166
6.4.8 Metal-free area...........................................................................................................................167
Table of contents
MOBY D
8 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
6.4.9 Minimum distances between several SLGs.............................................................................. 168
6.4.10 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 169
7 Write/read devices with RS422 interface ............................................................................................... 171
7.1 Overview SLG with RS 422 for SIMATIC S7 and PROFIBUS DP-V1...................................... 171
7.2 SLG D10S basic unit................................................................................................................. 174
7.2.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 174
7.2.2 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 175
7.2.3 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 176
7.2.4 FCC information ........................................................................................................................ 177
7.2.5 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 178
7.3 SLG D11S basic unit................................................................................................................. 179
7.3.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 179
7.3.2 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 180
7.3.3 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 181
7.3.4 FCC information ........................................................................................................................ 182
7.3.5 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 183
7.4 SLG D12S ................................................................................................................................. 184
7.4.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 184
7.4.2 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 185
7.4.3 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 186
7.4.4 FCC information ........................................................................................................................ 187
7.4.5 Transmission window................................................................................................................ 188
7.4.6 Secondary fields........................................................................................................................ 189
7.4.7 Influence of metal...................................................................................................................... 190
7.4.8 Metal-free area.......................................................................................................................... 191
7.4.9 Minimum distances between several SLGs.............................................................................. 192
7.4.10 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 193
7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version) ...................................................................................................... 194
7.5.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 194
7.5.2 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 195
7.5.3 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 196
7.5.4 Field data................................................................................................................................... 197
7.5.5 Transmission window................................................................................................................ 198
7.5.6 Secondary fields........................................................................................................................ 199
7.5.7 Influence of metal...................................................................................................................... 200
7.5.8 Metal-free area.......................................................................................................................... 201
7.5.9 Minimum distances between several SLGs.............................................................................. 202
7.5.10 Dimensional diagram ................................................................................................................ 203
8 Antennas ............................................................................................................................................... 205
8.1 ANT D2...................................................................................................................................... 205
8.1.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 205
8.1.2 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 205
8.1.3 Technical specifications for ANT D2 ......................................................................................... 206
8.1.4 Transmission window................................................................................................................ 207
8.1.5 Metal-free area.......................................................................................................................... 208
8.1.6 Minimum distance between several ANT D2 antennas ............................................................ 209
8.1.7 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 209
8.2 ANT D5...................................................................................................................................... 210
8.2.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 210
8.2.2 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 210
8.2.3 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 211
Table of contents
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 9
8.2.4 Transmission window.................................................................................................................212
8.2.5 Metal-free area...........................................................................................................................213
8.2.6 Minimum distance between antennas .......................................................................................214
8.2.7 Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................215
8.3 ANT D6 ......................................................................................................................................218
8.3.1 Features.....................................................................................................................................218
8.3.2 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................218
8.3.3 Technical data............................................................................................................................219
8.3.4 Transmission window.................................................................................................................220
8.3.5 Metal-free area...........................................................................................................................221
8.3.6 Minimum distance between antennas .......................................................................................221
8.3.7 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................222
8.4 ANT D10 ....................................................................................................................................223
8.4.1 Features.....................................................................................................................................223
8.4.2 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................223
8.4.3 Technical data............................................................................................................................224
8.4.4 Transmission window.................................................................................................................225
8.4.5 Metal-free area...........................................................................................................................226
8.4.6 Minimum distance between antennas .......................................................................................227
8.4.7 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................228
9 System integration................................................................................................................................. 229
9.1 ASM 452 ....................................................................................................................................231
9.1.1 Application area .........................................................................................................................231
9.1.2 Features.....................................................................................................................................231
9.1.3 Configuration..............................................................................................................................232
9.1.4 PROFIBUS DP communication .................................................................................................233
9.1.4.1 PROFIBUS DP configuring........................................................................................................233
9.1.4.2 Operating mode of the ASM 452 ...............................................................................................233
9.1.4.3 PROFIBUS DP diagnostics........................................................................................................233
9.1.4.4 PROFIBUS DP address and terminating resistor......................................................................234
9.1.5 Device connections....................................................................................................................235
9.1.5.1 Reader connection system ........................................................................................................235
9.1.5.2 Pin assignments.........................................................................................................................237
9.1.6 Cable..........................................................................................................................................238
9.1.6.1 PROFIBUS DP cable with 24 V supply......................................................................................238
9.1.6.2 Example of stripped lengths.......................................................................................................238
9.1.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................239
9.1.8 Dimension diagram ....................................................................................................................240
9.1.9 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................241
9.2 ASM 456 ....................................................................................................................................242
9.3 ASM 473 ....................................................................................................................................243
9.3.1 Application area .........................................................................................................................243
9.3.2 Features.....................................................................................................................................243
9.3.3 Basic module - Requirements for operation of ASM 473 ..........................................................244
9.3.4 Configuration..............................................................................................................................245
9.3.5 Device connections....................................................................................................................247
9.3.5.1 Reader connection system ........................................................................................................247
9.3.5.2 Pin assignments.........................................................................................................................248
9.3.6 Technical data............................................................................................................................250
9.3.7 Dimension diagram ....................................................................................................................251
9.3.8 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................252
9.4 ASM 475 ....................................................................................................................................253
Table of contents
MOBY D
10 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
9.4.1 Application area ........................................................................................................................ 253
9.4.2 Features .................................................................................................................................... 254
9.4.3 Configuration............................................................................................................................. 254
9.4.4 Configuration............................................................................................................................. 256
9.4.5 PROFIBUS DP communication ................................................................................................ 257
9.4.5.1 Diagnosis using LEDs ............................................................................................................... 257
9.4.6 Device connections ................................................................................................................... 258
9.4.6.1 Wiring to the SLG...................................................................................................................... 258
9.4.6.2 Shield connection...................................................................................................................... 259
9.4.6.3 Lightning protection................................................................................................................... 260
9.4.7 Cable......................................................................................................................................... 260
9.4.7.1 Cable assembly by the customer.............................................................................................. 260
9.4.8 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 261
9.4.9 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 262
9.5 RF170C..................................................................................................................................... 263
9.6 RF180C..................................................................................................................................... 264
9.7 RF182C..................................................................................................................................... 265
10 Accessories ........................................................................................................................................... 267
10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems ......................................................... 267
10.1.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 267
10.1.2 Scope of supply......................................................................................................................... 268
10.1.3 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 268
10.1.4 Safety Information ..................................................................................................................... 269
10.1.5 Connecting ................................................................................................................................ 271
10.1.6 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 271
10.1.7 Pin assignment of DC outputs and mains connection .............................................................. 273
10.1.8 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 274
10.1.9 Certificates and approvals......................................................................................................... 275
10.2 Mobile handheld terminals ........................................................................................................ 276
10.3 MOBY antenna distributor......................................................................................................... 277
11 Alarm, error and system messages ....................................................................................................... 279
11.1 Error messages and causes for MOBY D in combination with the MDWAPI library ................ 280
11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS
addressing) ............................................................................................................................... 282
11.2.1 General errors ........................................................................................................................... 282
11.2.2 Error messages......................................................................................................................... 283
12 Troubleshooting/FAQ............................................................................................................................. 293
A Certificates and approvals ..................................................................................................................... 295
B Service & Support.................................................................................................................................. 299
C Previous versions .................................................................................................................................. 301
C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB .............................................................................. 301
C.1.1 Compatibility list ........................................................................................................................ 301
C.1.2 MDS D124 (MLFB 6GT2600-0AC00) ....................................................................................... 302
C.1.3 MDS D139 (MLFB 6GT2600-0AA00) ....................................................................................... 306
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5................................................................................................ 311
C.2.1 Compatibility list ........................................................................................................................ 311
C.2.2 SLG D10 ANT D5 (MLFB 6GT2601-0AA00) ............................................................................ 311
Table of contents
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 11
C.2.3 SLG D11 ANT D5 (MLFB 6GT2601-0AC00).............................................................................319
C.2.4 SLG D10S ANT D5 (6GT2602-0AA00) .....................................................................................326
C.2.5 SLG D11S ANT D5 (6GT2602-0AC00) .....................................................................................333
D List of abbreviations............................................................................................................................... 341
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 343
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 347
Table of contents
MOBY D
12 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 13
Introduction 1
1.1 Preface
Objective of this documentation
This system manual contains all the information needed to plan and configure the system.
It is intended both for programming and testing/debugging personnel who commission the
system themselves and connect it with other units (automation systems, further
programming devices), as well as for service and maintenance personnel who install
expansions or carry out fault/error analyses.
Scope of this document
This documentation is valid for all supplied versions of the MOBY D system and describes
the state of delivery as of 01/2010.
Introduction
1.1 Preface
MOBY D
14 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
History
Previous editions of these operating instructions:
Output
01/2010 MDS D165, MDS D200, MDS D261, MDS D324, MDS D424, MDS D428,
MDS D460
SIMATIC RF180C, RF182C interface modules
SLG D12S (plug-in version)
ANT D2
11/2006 Edition of a system manual with adaptation of the content structures
Supplements:
SIMATIC RF170C interface module
Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
09/2005 Edition of a system manual with adaptation of the content structures
Supplements:
write/read device SLG D10/D10S basic unit
ANT D6m, ANT D10 antennas
ASM 456 interface module
MOBY antenna distributor
09/2003 Supplements:
MDS D100, MDS D124 mobile data storage unit
SLG D11S ANT D5; SLG D12S write/read devices
12/2002 Supplements:
Write/read device SLG D10S ANT D5
ASM 452; ASM 473; ASM 475 interface modules
10/2002 First edition of the configuration manual
Conformity Certificates
The EC declaration of conformity and the corresponding documentation are made available
to the appropriate authorities in accordance with EC directives. Your sales representative
can provide these on request.
Observance of installation guidelines
Adhere to the installation guidelines and safety instructions given in this documentation
during commissioning and operation.
Introduction
1.2 Navigating in the system manual
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 15
1.2 Navigating in the system manual
Structure of contents Contents
Table of contents Organization of the documentation, including the index of pages and chapters
Introduction Purpose, layout and description of the important topics.
Safety instructions All generally valid safety-related aspects that
according to legal regulations
from a product/system viewpoint at installation,
at startup,
during operation
have to be observed.
System overview Overview of all RF identification systems, system overview of MOBY D
Planning the MOBY D system Information regarding:
Possible applications of MOBY D
Support in application planning
Selection aids for finding the suitable MOBY D components.
Mobile data storage units Description of the mobile data storage units (MDS) used for MOBY D
Write/read devices with
RS232 interface
Description of the write/read devices (SLG) with RS232 interface used for MOBY D
Write/read devices with
RS422 interface
Description of the write/read devices (SLG) with RS422 interface used for MOBY D
Antennas Description of the external MOBY D antennas
System integration Description of the interface modules (ASM) used for MOBY D
Accessories Products supplied separately for MOBY D
Alarm, error and system
messages
Overview of error messages
Troubleshooting/FAQ Troubleshooting and error messages
Appendix Certificates and approvals
Service and support
Previous versions List of components with a successor version or which have been discontinued.
List of Abbreviations List of all abbreviations used in the document
Glossary List of all terms used in the document
Index Index
Introduction
1.3 Overview
MOBY D
16 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
1.3 Overview
MOBY D is an RF identification system based on the ISO/IEC 15693 standard in the
13.56 MHz range. ISO/IEC 15693 creates a common basis for tags and Smartlabels from
different manufacturers for the first time.
Application areas typically encompass the following:
● Replacement for electronic barcode
● Supplement to barcode or delivery note in harsh environments
● Warehouse and distribution logistics
● Product identification
MOBY D can be directly connected to a PC with Windows 9x Professional, 2000
Professional und NT Professional over a serial (RS 232) interface and is supported by a
powerful C library.
It is integrated into SIMATIC S7 and PROFIBUS DP-V1 using the well-proven MOBY
interface modules
● ASM 452
● ASM 456
● ASM 473
● ASM 475
● SIMATIC RF170C
● SIMATIC RF180C
● SIMATIC RF182C
An easy-to-operate interface is available to the S7 user.
With the MOBY D write/read device, the standardized, low-cost write/read transponders
(Smartlabels based on ISO/IEC 15693) are processed at distances of up to 650 mm
(depending on the size of transponder and antenna).
Introduction
1.4 Main applications
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 17
1.4 Main applications
The design of the transponder permits a variety of flexible designs, ensuring optimum
dimensioning for the widest variety of applications.
Low-cost Smartlabels for large volume applications:
● Container and box identification in open systems
● Distribution logistics and goods identification
● Parcel and postal services, couriers and logistics companies
● Baggage check-in and baggage tracking
Up to 100 Smartlabels can be simultaneously detected (bulk detection) and the data can be
selectively processed (multitag mode).
Rugged data storage units in closed processes:
● Container and box identification in logistics and distribution
● Production logistics and assembly lines with extreme temperature requirements (e.g.
paintshops, temperature range up to +220 °C)
● Parts identification (e.g. data storage unit is attached directly to product/pallet).
Introduction
1.4 Main applications
MOBY D
18 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 19
Safety information/instructions 2
2.1 General safety instructions
SIMATIC RFID products comply with the salient safety specifications to IEC, VDE, EN, UL
and CSA. If you have questions about the validity of the installation in the planned
environment, please contact your service representative.
CAUTION
Alterations to the devices are not permitted.
Failure to observe this requirement shall constitute a revocation of the radio equipment
approval, CE approval and manufacturer's warranty.
Repairs
Repairs may only be carried out by authorized qualified personnel.
WARNING
Unauthorized opening of and improper repairs to the device may result in substantial
damage to equipment or risk of personal injury to the user.
System expansion
Only install system expansion devices designed for this device. If you install other upgrades,
you may damage the system or violate the safety requirements and regulations for radio
frequency interference suppression. Contact your technical support team or your sales outlet
to find out which system upgrades are suitable for installation.
CAUTION
If you cause system defects by installing or exchanging system expansion devices, the
warranty becomes void.
Safety information/instructions
2.1 General safety instructions
MOBY D
20 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 21
System overview 3
3.1 System overview for MOBY D
System overview
3.1 System overview for MOBY D
MOBY D
22 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
&RPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOHV:ULWHUHDGGHYLFHV$QWHQQDV
0RELOHGDWDVWRUDJHXQLWV
,QGXFWLYHSRZHUGDWDWUDQVPLVVLRQ0+]
6\VWHPLQWHUQDO56LQWHUIDFH6\VWHPLQWHUQDO56LQWHUIDFH
3&LQWHUIDFH
56
0':$3,
$60b
IRU
6,0$7,&6
5)&
IRU
(7SUR
$60b
IRU
(7;
$60IRU
352),%86
'39
$60bIRU
352),%86
'3'39
5)&
5)&
IRU352),1(7,2
0'6' 0'6' 0'6' 0'6' 0'6' 0'6'0'6'0'6'
0'6'
0'6'
0'6'
6/*' 6/*'6/*'6/*'6 6/*'6
$17' $17'
6/*'6
$17'
$17' $17' $17' $17'
$17'
Figure 3-1 Overview of MOBY D components
System overview
3.1 System overview for MOBY D
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 23
SLG D10/D10S
with
SLG D11/D11S with SLG D12/D12S Tags
ANT D5 ANT D6 ANT D10 ANT D2 ANT D5 -
MDS D100 ✓ ✓ ✓ ○ ✓ ✓
MDS D124 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
MDS D139 ✓ ✓ ✓ ○ ✓ ✓
MDS D160 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
MDS D324 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
MDS D424 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
MDS D428 ✓ ✓ ✓ ○ ✓ ✓
MDS D460 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
MDS D165 ✓ ✓ ✓ ○ ✓ ✓
MDS D200 ✓ ✓ ✓ ○ ✓ ✓
MDS D261 ✓ ✓ ✓ ○ ✓ ✓
✓ Combination possible
○ Combination possible, but not recommended
System overview
3.1 System overview for MOBY D
MOBY D
24 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 25
Planning the MOBY D system 4
4.1 Fundamentals of application planning
Assess your application according to the following criteria, in order to choose the right MOBY
D components:
● Transmission distance (read/write distance)
● Data volume to be transferred
● Metal-free areas for MDS and SLG (antenna)
● Static or dynamic data transfer
● Speed in case of dynamic transfer
● Tracking tolerances
● Ambient conditions such as relative humidity, temperature, chemical impacts, etc.
● Maximum writes per MDS
● System connection
4.1.1 Transmission window and read/write distance
The write/read device (SLG) generates an inductive alternating field. The field is at its
strongest near the antenna and declines rapidly as the distance from the antenna increases.
The distribution of the field depends on the structure and geometry of the antennas in the
write/read device and MDS.
A prerequisite for the function of the MDS is a minimum field strength at the MDS that is
achieved at a distance Sg from the write/read device. The figures below show as an example
the transmission window between the MDS and ANT D5 antenna (in this case always
parallel alignment of MDS to antenna/SLG).
Planning the MOBY D system
4.1 Fundamentals of application planning
MOBY D
26 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
6J
6D
$17'
/
0'6
0'6
63
/
7UDQVPLVVLRQ
ZLQGRZ
0HWDOSODWHVSDFHUNLW*7$%
6LGHYLHZ
3ODQYLHZ
Sa: Operating distance between MDS and SLG
Sg Limit distance
(maximum clear distance between upper surface of antenna and MDS, at which the
transmission can still function under normal conditions)
L Length of the transmission window (300 mm)
SP Crossover point of the axes of symmetry of the MDS
Figure 4-1 Transmission window based on the example of ANT D5
The active field to the MDS comprises a circle (ANT D5) or a square (ANT D6, D10;
SLG D12/D12S). The MDS can be processed as soon as the crossover point (CP) of the
MDS enters the circle or square of the transmission window. The direction of movement and
rotation of the MDS has no effect.
From the diagrams above, it can also be seen that operation is possible within the area
between Sa and Sg. The active operating area reduces as the distance increases, and
shrinks to a single point at distance Sg. Only static mode should thus be used in the area
between Sa and Sg.
For more detailed information on the transmission windows of the individual antennas, refer
to the respective antenna or SLG chapters.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.1 Fundamentals of application planning
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 27
4.1.2 Width of the transmission window
Determining the width of the transmission window
The following approximation formula can be used for practical applications:
W: Width of transmission window (median deviation)
L: Length of the transmission window
Tracking tolerance
The width of the transmission window (W) is particularly important for the mechanical
tracking tolerance. The formula for the dwell time is valid without restriction when W is
observed.
4.1.3 Transmission window with auxiliary fields
In general, auxiliary fields always exist. They can be found outside the antenna conductor
loop and must be used for configuring only in exceptional cases since the write/read
distances are limited.
In the case of parallel movement of the MDS with a short operating distance through the
antenna field, a transmission-free space is traversed when moving from the auxiliary field to
the main field and also when exiting the main field (multiple presence change possible).
Precise information on the field geometries of the auxiliary fields cannot be given since the
values depend heavily on the operating distance and the application area.
① SLG
② Main field
③ Secondary fields
Figure 4-2 Transmission window with auxiliary fields for SLG
Planning the MOBY D system
4.1 Fundamentals of application planning
MOBY D
28 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
① Antenna
② Main field
③ Secondary fields
Figure 4-3 Transmission window with auxiliary fields for antennas
Planning the MOBY D system
4.1 Fundamentals of application planning
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 29
4.1.4 Permissible directions of motion of the MDS
Coverage area of antenna and direction of motion of MDS
The MDS and antenna have no polarization axis, i.e. the MDS can come in from any
direction, be placed at any position, and cross the transmission window. The data of the
transmission window do not differ. The figure below shows the coverage area of the antenna
for various directions of MDS motion:
:
/
:
:
/RU RU
Transmission window
Direction of motion of the MDS
Coverage area L x W
Figure 4-4 Coverage areas of antenna/detection area of SLG for different directions of MDS motion
Planning the MOBY D system
4.1 Fundamentals of application planning
MOBY D
30 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
4.1.5 Operation in static and dynamic mode
Operation in static mode
If working in static mode, the MDS can be operated up to the limit distance (Sg). The MDS
must then be positioned exactly over the SLG or the antenna:
7UDQVPLVVLRQ
ZLQGRZ
0HWDOSODWHVSDFHUNLW
6J
0'6
$17'
Figure 4-5 ANT D5: Operation in static mode
Operation in dynamic mode
3ODQYLHZ
7UDQVPLVVLRQ
ZLQGRZ
/
0'6
0'6
$17'
Figure 4-6 ANT D5: Operation in dynamic mode
Planning the MOBY D system
4.1 Fundamentals of application planning
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 31
4.1.6 Communication between ASM, write/read device and MDS
Communication with the SLG is asynchronous with a transmission rate of
● 19.2 Kbaud with SLG D11S/SLG D12S
● 38.4 Kbaud with SLG D11/SLG D12
● 115.2 Kbaud with SLG D10/SLG D10S
Table 4- 1 Data transmission rate
with MDS D1xx/MDS D2xx/MDS D3xx with MDS D4xx
reading ≥ 2.5 ms/byte
Writing ≥ 9.5 ms/byte
≤ 2.5 ms/byte
Table 4- 2 Transfer time for UID number (8 bytes)
SLG Transmission time
SLG D11S/SLG D12S 60 ms (at 19.2 Kbaud)
SLG D11/SLG D12 60 ms (at 38.4 Kbaud)
SLG D10/SLG D10S 50 ms (at 115.2 Kbaud)
Table 4- 3 Traversing speed for SLG D1x / ANT Dx (with one transponder in the field)
SLG D10 SLG D11 SLG
D12
SLG D10S SLG D11S SLG
D12S
ANT
D10*
ANT
D6
ANT
D5
ANT
D2
ANT
D5
ANT
D10*
ANT
D6
ANT
D5
ANT
D2
ANT
D5
UID number
(8 bytes)
≤ 15 ≤ 8.0 ≤ 5.0 ≤ 1.2 ≤ 3.5 ≤ 2.5 ≤ 6.0 ≤ 3.8 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 0.4 ≤ 1.0 ≤ 0.8
ISO tags, e.g. MDS D100
Read
(with 4 bytes
user data /
1 block)
≤ 10 ≤ 6.0 ≤ 3.5 ≤ 1.2 ≤ 1.6 ≤ 1.2 ≤ 6.5 ≤ 4.0 ≤ 2.2 ≤ 0.4 ≤ 3.0 ≤ 1.4
Write
(with 4 bytes
user data /
1 block)
≤ 9 ≤ 5.5 ≤ 3.0 ≤ 0.2 ≤ 1.2 ≤ 1.0 ≤ 5.5 ≤ 3.4 ≤ 1.8 ≤ 0.3 ≤ 2.8 ≤ 1.2
Read
(with 112
bytes of
complete user
data)
≤ 7.5 ≤ 4.0 ≤ 2.4 ≤ 0.4 ≤ 1.4 ≤ 0.8 ≤ 5.0 ≤ 3.0 ≤ 1.6 ≤ 0.2 ≤ 2.2 ≤ 1.0
Write
(with 112
bytes of
complete user
data)
≤ 2.0 ≤ 1.0 ≤ 0.6 ≤ 0.1 ≤ 0.4 ≤ 0.2 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 1.0 ≤ 0.6 ≤ 0.1 ≤ 0.5 ≤ 0.2
All values in the table in m/s
* Traversing speed in lateral direction as for SLG D10 ANT D5/SLG D10S ANT D5
Planning the MOBY D system
4.1 Fundamentals of application planning
MOBY D
32 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
4.1.7 Tolerance of tracking of pallet
:
&HQWHUOLQHEHWZHHQ0'6DQG6/*
7UDFNLQJWROHUDQFHEDQG
'LUHFWLRQRIPRWLRQRIWKH0'6
: :LGWKRIWKHWUDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZ
LQG\QDPLFPRGH
0'6
Figure 4-7 Example ANT D5: Tolerance of tracking of pallet
Determining the width of the transmission window
The following approximation formula can be used for practical applications:
% y/
W: Width of the transmission window in dynamic mode
L: Length of the transmission window
Figure 4-8 Formula: Width of the transmission window
Tracking tolerance
The width of the transmission window (W) is particularly important for the mechanical
tracking tolerance.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.2 Field data
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 33
4.2 Field data
4.2.1 Field data for MDS and SLG
The field data of the MDS and SLG are shown in the table below. Thus it becomes
particularly easy to select the right MDS and SLG. All the technical specifications listed are
typical data and are applicable for the respective operating temperature of the MDS and SLG
used (see Technical data of the MDS and SLG used). Tolerances of ±20% are admissible
due to production and temperature conditions.
Note
In order to ensure optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at
the factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal.
Note
The field data for the following MDS is only valid with a corresponding order number:
MDS D100 with order number 6GT2600-0AD10
MDS D124 with order number 6GT2600-0AC10
MDS D139 with order number 6GT2600-0AA10
MDS D160 with order number 6GT2600-0AB10
SLG D10/D10S with ANT D5
Table 4- 4 SLG D10/D10S with ANT D5
Diameter of the
transmission window (Ld)
Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg)
MDS D100 ∅ 320 0...400 500
MDS D124 ∅ 300 0...200 280
MDS D139 ∅ 320 0...400 500
MDS D160 ∅ 300 0...130 180
MDS D324 ∅ 300 0...200 280
MDS D424 ∅ 300 0...200 280
MDS D428 ∅ 300 0...120 160
MDS D460 ∅ 300 0...120 160
MDS D165 ∅ 320 0...350 450
MDS D200 ∅ 320 0...400 500
MDS D261 ∅ 320 0...300 400
All values are in mm
Planning the MOBY D system
4.2 Field data
MOBY D
34 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
SLG D10/D10S with ANT D6
Table 4- 5 SLG D10/D10S with ANT D6
Length of the transmission window Operating distance
(Sa)
Limit distance (Sg)
in the X direction
(Lx)
in the Y direction
(Ly)
MDS D100 520 420 0...550 650
MDS D124 500 400 0...220 300
MDS D139 520 420 0...500 600
MDS D160 500 400 0...130 180
MDS D324 500 400 0...200 280
MDS D424 500 400 0...220 300
MDS D428 500 400 0...100 150
MDS D460 500 500 0...100 150
MDS D165 520 420 0...400 500
MDS D200 520 420 0...500 600
MDS D261 520 420 0...350 400
All values are in mm
SLG D10/D10S with ANT D10
Table 4- 6 SLG D10/D10S with ANT D10
Length of the transmission window Operating distance
(Sa)
Limit distance (Sg)
in the X direction
(Lx)
in the Y direction
(Ly)
MDS D100 1050 350 0...500 600
MDS D124 1000 300 0...200 280
MDS D139 1050 350 0...450 550
MDS D160 1000 300 0...130 180
MDS D324 1000 300 0...200 280
MDS D424 1000 300 0...200 280
MDS D428 1000 300 0...100 150
MDS D460 1000 300 0...100 150
MDS D165 1050 350 0...350 450
MDS D200 1050 350 0...450 550
MDS D261 1050 350 0...300 400
All values are in mm
Planning the MOBY D system
4.2 Field data
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 35
SLG D11/D11S with ANT D2
Table 4- 7 SLG D11/D11S with ANT D2
Length of the transmission
window (L)
Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg)
MDS D124 60 45...70 90
MDS D160 50 35...55 65
MDS D324 50 35...60 70
MDS D424 60 45...70 90
MDS D460 50 30...50 60
All values are in mm
SLG D11/D11S with ANT D5
Table 4- 8 SLG D11/D11S with ANT D5
Diameter of the
transmission window (Ld)
Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg)
MDS D100 ∅ 300 0...300 380
MDS D124 ∅ 280 0...150 220
MDS D139 ∅ 300 0...280 350
MDS D160 ∅ 280 0...75 110
MDS D324 ∅ 280 0...120 160
MDS D424 ∅ 280 0...150 200
MDS D428 ∅ 280 0...70 100
MDS D460 ∅ 280 0...70 100
MDS D165 ∅ 300 0...220 300
MDS D200 ∅ 300 0...220 320
MDS D261 ∅ 300 0...200 280
All values are in mm
Planning the MOBY D system
4.2 Field data
MOBY D
36 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
SLG D12/D12S/D12S plug-in version
Table 4- 9 SLG D12/D12S
Length of the transmission window Operating distance
(Sa)
Limit distance (Sg)
in the X direction
(Lx)
in the Y direction
(Ly)
MDS D100 120 60 0...160 220
MDS D124 120 60 0...70 100
MDS D139 120 60 0...120 150
MDS D160 120 60 0...45 65
MDS D324 120 60 0...60 80
MDS D424 120 60 0...70 100
MDS D428 120 60 0...40 60
MDS D460 120 60 0...40 60
MDS D165 120 60 0...120 150
MDS D200 120 60 0...120 160
MDS D261 120 60 0...100 140
All values are in mm
Planning the MOBY D system
4.2 Field data
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 37
4.2.2 Minimum spacing
Table 4- 10 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS (without multitag mode)
MDS D100 / MDS D139 /
MDS D165 / MDS D200 /
MDS D261
MDS D124 / MDS D160 /
MDS D324 / MDS D424 /
MDS D428 / MDS D460
ANT D5 ≥ 1 m ≥ 0.8 m
ANT D6 ≥ 1.5 m ≥ 1.2 m
SLG D10/D10S
ANT D10 ≥ 2 m ≥ 1.8 m
ANT D2
Horizontal main field
Vertical main field
--
--
≥ 0.4 m
≥ 0.1 m
SLG D11/D11S
ANT D5 ≥ 1 m ≥ 0.8 m
SLG D12/SLG D12S/
SLG D12S
(plug-in version)
≥ 0.3 m ≥ 0.5 m
Reduction of the minimum spacing in multitag mode is permitted
(SLG D10/SLG D11/SLG D12, RS232).
Table 4- 11 Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (antennas)
SLG D10/
SLG D10S
SLG D11/
SLG D11S
SLG D12/
SLG D12S/
SLG D12S
(plug-in version)
ANT D5 ANT D6 ANT D10 ANT D2 ANT D5
ANT D5 ≥ 2 m ≥ 2 m ≥ 2 m ≥ 1 m ≥ 2 m ≥ 1 m
ANT D6 ≥ 2 m ≥ 2 m ≥ 2 m ≥ 1 m ≥ 2 m ≥ 1 m
SLG D10/
SLG D10S
ANT D10 ≥ 2 m ≥ 2 m ≥ 2 m ≥ 1 m ≥ 2 m ≥ 1 m
ANT D2 ≥ 1 m ≥ 1 m ≥ 1 m ≥ 0.5 m ≥ 0.8 m ≥ 0.8 m SLG
D11/SLG
D11S ANT D5 ≥ 2 m ≥ 2 m ≥ 2 m ≥ 0.8 m ≥ 2 m ≥ 1 m
SLG D12/SLG D12S/
SLG D12S
(plug-in version)
≥ 1 m ≥ 1 m ≥ 1 m ≥ 0.8 m ≥ 1 m ≥ 1 m
NOTICE
Extension of the data transmission time if distance values are undershot
If the distance values specified in the tables are undershot, it is possible that the inductive
fields will be affected. In this case, the data transmission time can increase unpredictably or
a command is aborted with an error.
For this reason, please observe the values in the tables.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
38 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
4.3 Installation guidelines
4.3.1 Overview
The MDS and SLG are inductive devices. Any type of metal, in particular iron and
ferromagnetic materials, in the vicinity of these devices will affect their operation. Some
points need to be considered during planning and installation if the field data described in the
preceding chapter are to retain their validity:
● The use of permissible mounting material
● The minimum distance between two antennas
(see chapter "Antennas (Page 205)")
● The minimum distance between two adjacent MDS
(see chapter "Mobile data storage units (Page 95)")
● The metal-free area for flush-mounting of SLGs in metal
● Mounting of multiple antennas on metal frames or racks
The following sections describe the impact on the functionality of the MOBY D identification
system when mounted in the vicinity of metal.
4.3.2 Permissible mounting material
Securing SLG and antennas
In order to comply with UL guidelines, the components must only be secured with the fixing
materials described below.
The positions of the fixing holes for the device are shown in the
Dimension drawings
section.
Fixing to metal
Table 4- 13 Fixing the SLG and antennas to metal
SLG/antenna Screw type1
SLG D11, SLG D11S;
SLG D12, SLG D12S;
Antenna duplexer
M5 x 8, 8.8, DIN ISO 4017
SLG D10, SLG D10S M6 x 8, 8.8, DIN ISO 4017
Antenna ANT D5 M6 x 8, 8.8, DIN ISO 4017
ANT D6 antenna M6 x 8, 8.8, DIN ISO 4017
ANT D10 antenna M6 x 8, 8.8, DIN ISO 4017
1) Represents minimum length
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 39
Fixing to reinforced concrete
Table 4- 14 Fixing the SLG and antennas to reinforced concrete
SLG/antenna Screw type1 Plug type (nylon)
SLG D11, SLG D11S;
SLG D12, SLG D12S;
Antenna duplexer
5 x 40 mm 6 mm, e.g. fischer S6, Type No.: 50106
SLG D10, SLG D10S 6 x 40 mm 8 mm, e.g. fischer S8, Type No.: 50108
Antenna ANT D5 5 x 40 mm 6 mm, e.g. fischer S6, Type No.: 50106
ANT D6 antenna 6 x 40 mm 8 mm, e.g. fischer S8, Type No.: 50108
ANT D10 antenna 5 x 40 mm 8 mm, e.g. fischer S8, Type No.: 50108
1) Represents minimum length
WARNING
Ensure that the wall or ceiling can hold four times the total weight of the device.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
40 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
4.3.3 Metal-free area
The metal-free area for the MDS
Direct mounting of the MDS on metal or flush-mounting in metal is not permitted. If the MDS
is directly mounted onto metal, all functions of the MDS will be disabled.
The minimum distance between the MDS and metal is shown in the appropriate sections
"Metal-free area" of the chapter Mobile data storage units (Page 95).
The metal-free area for the SLG D12/SLG D12S
When mounting the SLG, it is important to note that metal in the vicinity of the antennas can
affect the field data.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 41
ANT D5
ANT D5 must be mounted electrically isolated, direct mounting on metal is not permitted.
The maximum field data (no interference = 100 %) are achieved when the antenna ANT D5
is mounted at a distance of 100 mm from metal (spacer kit 6GT2690-0AB00).
0HWDO
K PPQRQPHWDOVSDFHU
Figure 4-9 ANT D5: Insulated mounting on metal
1RQPHWDOVSDFHU
0HWDO
PP PP
PP
Figure 4-10 ANT D5: Installation in metal
See also Subsection
Influencing the transmission window
.
ANT D6/D10
Mounting on metal permitted. Typical distances from metal are indicated in the section
Metal-free area
in the chapter
write/read devices
.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
42 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
SLG D12/SLG D12S
With SLG D12/SLG D12S with integral antenna, the height of the housing provides sufficient
distance from the metal base; the device can be mounted directly onto metal. In the case of
flush-mounting, you must however comply with the specified lateral distance to metal.
0HWDO
K +HLJKWRIWKH6/* PP
K
Figure 4-11 Mounting on metal: SLG D12/SLG D12S
0HWDO
DE 0HWDOIUHHGLVWDQFHV PP
E
E
D
D
Figure 4-12 Flush-mounting in metal: SLG D12/SLG D12S
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 43
4.3.4 Influences affecting the transmission window
In general, the following points should be considered when mounting MOBY D components:
● Flush-mounting of components in metal reduces the field data.
● When working inside the transmission window, it should be ensured that no metal rails or
closed conductor loops protrude into the transmission field. They would impair the field
profile.
● It is recommended that a test is performed in critical applications.
● In order to ensure optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at
the factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal (see the following tables). Therefore it
must always be operated at a distance of 100 mm from metal.
The impact of metal on the field data (Sg, Sa, Lx, Ly) is shown in tabular and graphical
format in this section.
The values in the tables describe field data reduction as a percentage (100% means no
impact).
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
44 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
SLG D12/D12S
Table 4- 15 Reduction of field data by metal (in %): MDS and SLG D12/D12S
SLG D12/D12S
Transponder
Without metal
On metal Flush-mounted
In metal
(50 mm all-
round)
Without metal 100 80 70
On metal; distance 20 mm 70 70 60
MDS D100
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 20 mm
65 55 55
Without metal 100 80 70
On metal; distance 25 mm 80 65 55
MDS D124
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
65 55 50
Without metal 100 65 65 MDS D139
On metal; distance 30 mm 90 65 65
Without metal 100 80 80 MDS D160
On metal; distance 25 mm 100 80 80
Without metal 100 80 70
On metal; distance 25 mm 80 65 55
MDS D324
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
65 55 50
Without metal 100 80 70
On metal; distance 25 mm 80 65 55
MDS D424
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
65 55 50
Without metal 100 80 80 MDS D428
On metal 80 70 70
Without metal 100 80 80 MDS D460
On metal; distance 25 mm 80 70 70
Without metal 100 80 70
On metal; distance 20 mm 70 70 60
MDS D200
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 20 mm
65 55 55
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 45
SLG D11/D11S with ANT D5
Table 4- 16 Reduction of field data by metal (in %): MDS and SLG D11/D11S with ANT D5
SLG D11/D11S with ANT D5
Transponder
On metal
100 mm distance
Flush-mounted
in metal
100 mm distance
(150 mm all-round)
Without metal 100 95
On metal; distance 20 mm 60 55
MDS D100
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 20 mm
45 40
Without metal 100 95
On metal, distance 25 mm 60 55
MDS D124
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
40 35
Without metal 100 95 MDS D139
On metal, distance 30 mm 80 75
Without metal 100 90
On metal; distance 25 mm 55 50
MDS D160 1)
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
-- --
Without metal 100 95
On metal; distance 25 mm 60 55
MDS D324
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
40 35
Without metal 100 95
On metal; distance 25 mm 60 55
MDS D424
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
40 35
Without metal 100 95 MDS D428
On metal 40 35
Without metal 100 95 MDS D460
On metal; distance 25 mm 40 35
Without metal 100 95
On metal; distance 20 mm 60 55
MDS D200
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 20 mm
45 40
1) Values apply to metal surfaces greater than 100 mm x 100 mm
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
46 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
SLG D10/D10S with ANT D5
Table 4- 17 Reduction of field data by metal (in %): MDS and SLG D10/D10S with ANT D5
SLG D10/D10S with ANT D5
Transponder
On metal Flush-mounted in metal
(150 mm all-round)
Without metal 100 95
On metal; distance 20 mm 65 60
MDS D100
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 20 mm
45 40
Without metal 100 95
On metal; distance 25 mm 85 80
MDS D124
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
65 60
Without metal 100 95 MDS D139
On metal, distance 30 mm 90 85
Without metal 100 95
On metal; distance 25 mm 70 65
MDS D160 1)
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
25 20
Without metal 100 95
On metal; distance 25 mm 75 70
MDS D324
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
-- --
Without metal 100 95
On metal; distance 25 mm 75 70
MDS D424
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
-- --
Without metal 100 95 MDS D428
On metal -- --
Without metal 100 95 MDS D460
On metal; distance 25 mm -- --
Without metal 100 95
On metal; distance 20 mm 65 60
MDS D200
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 20 mm
-- --
1) Values apply to metal surfaces greater than 100 mm x 100 mm
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 47
SLG D10/D10S with ANT D6
Table 4- 18 Reduction of field data by metal (in %): MDS and SLG D10/D10S with ANT D6
SLG D10/D10S with ANT D6
Transponder
On metal Flush-mounted in metal
(200 mm all-round)
Without metal 100 95
On metal; distance 20 mm 65 60
MDS D100
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 20 mm
-- --
Without metal 100 95
On metal, distance 25 mm 80 75
MDS D124
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
-- --
Without metal 100 90 MDS D139
On metal, distance 30 mm 80 70
Without metal 100 90
On metal; distance 25 mm 60 55
MDS D160 1)
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
-- --
Without metal 100 95
On metal; distance 25 mm 75 70
MDS D324
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
-- --
Without metal 100 95
On metal; distance 25 mm 75 70
MDS D424
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
-- --
Without metal 100 95 MDS D428
On metal 70 65
Without metal 100 95 MDS D460
On metal 70 65
Without metal 100 95
On metal; distance 20 mm 65 60
MDS D200
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 20 mm
-- --
1) Values apply to metal surfaces greater than 100 mm x 100 mm
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
48 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
SLG D10/D10S with ANT D10
Table 4- 19 Reduction of field data by metal (in %): MDS and SLG D10/D10S with ANT D10
SLG D10/D10S with ANT D10
Transponder
On metal Flush-mounted in metal
(200 mm all-round)
Without metal 100 90
On metal; distance 20 mm 50 40
MDS D100
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 20 mm
-- --
Without metal 100 90
On metal, distance 25 mm 70 60
MDS D124
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
-- --
Without metal 100 90 MDS D139
On metal, distance 30 mm 80 70
Without metal 100 90
On metal; distance 25 mm 65 55
MDS D160 1)
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
-- --
Without metal 100 90
On metal; distance 25 mm 70 60
MDS D324
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
-- --
Without metal 100 90
On metal; distance 25 mm 70 60
MDS D424
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 25 mm
-- --
Without metal 100 90 MDS D428
On metal 50 40
Without metal 100 90 MDS D460
On metal; distance 25 mm 50 40
Without metal 100 90
On metal; distance 20 mm 50 40
MDS D200
Flush-mounted in metal;
distance all-round 20 mm
-- --
1) Values apply to metal surfaces greater than 100 mm x 100 mm
Note
The values specified in the tables must be complied with. The inductive fields may be
affected if the distance is smaller. In this case, the data transfer time would increase
unpredictably or a command would be aborted with an error.
If the distance is smaller, it is recommended that a test is performed.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 49
From the following diagrams, you can see the impact on the transmission window based on
the example of SLG D10 ANT D5 with MDS D139.
The percentages describe the reduction in field data for ANT D5 and MDS in a metal
environment (100% corresponds to no impact).
4.3.4.1 MDS in metal-free environment
0HWDO
0HWDO
1RQPHWDOVSDFHU
1RQPHWDOVSDFHU
0'6'
$17b'[
0'6'
PP
PP PP
PP
Figure 4-13 MDS in metal-free environment
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
50 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
4.3.4.2 MDS in the vicinity of metal
1RQPHWDOVSDFHU
1RQPHWDO
0HWDO
1RQPHWDO
0HWDO
0HWDO
0HWDO
1RQPHWDOVSDFHU
0'6'
0'6'
$17b'[
PP
PP
PP PP
PP
PP
Figure 4-14 MDS in the vicinity of metal
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 51
4.3.5 Reduction of interference due to metal
Interference due to metal rack
Interference due to metal rack Problem
0'6
6D
$17'
0HWDO
1RQPHWDOVSDFHU0HWDOUDFN 3ODWH
A metal rack is located above the
transmission window of ANT D5. This
affects the entire field. In particular, the
transmission window between ANT Dx and
the MDS is reduced.
Remedy:
0'6
6D
$17'
0HWDO
1RQPHWDOVSDFHU0HWDOVXSSRUW 3ODWH
The transmission window is no longer
affected if ANT Dx is mounted differently.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
52 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Flush-mounting
Flush-mounting Problem
$17b'[
Flush-mounting of MDS and SLG / ANT Dx
is possible in principle. However, the size of
the transmission window is significantly
reduced. The following measures can be
used to counteract the reduction of the
window:
Remedy:
$17b
'[
ุPP
[ุPP
ุPP
PHWDO
6SDFHUV
RUVSDFHUNLW
Replace the non-metal spacer below the
MDS with a larger one.
MDS and/or SLG / ANT Dx must be at least
50 mm higher than the surrounding metal.
(At a distance x ≥ 600 mm from metal, the
field is no longer noticeably affected.)
Remedy:
$17'[
EE
DD
Increase the non-metal distances a and b.
As a rule of thumb:
Select values for a and b that are larger
by a factor of 2 to 3
Increasing a and b has a greater effect
for antennas/MDS with a large limit
distance than for antennas/MDS with a
small limit distance.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 53
4.3.6 Mounting of multiple antennas on or between metal frames
Mounting of multiple antennas on or between metal frames
If closed conductor loops (metal frames, guides with cross struts) are located within the area
of the antenna's magnetic field, some of the energy will be coupled into these.
This effect results in:
● non-configurable field geometries
● undesirerd field propagation ("transformer effect")
The undesired field propagation would interfere with other antennas in the reception field or
reach other MDSs outside the configured fields.
To prevent these effects, care must be taken to avoid closed conductor loops in the
transmission range of the antennas or to interrupt them non-metallically.
$17'
$17'
&RQYH\RUEHOW
FKDLQFRQYH\RU
&URVVVWUXWV
PHWDO
1RQPHWDOOLF
VSDFHU
Figure 4-15 Conveyors/metal frames with non-metallic spacers
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
54 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
4.3.7 Installation and interconnection of 2, 3 or 4 MOBY D antennas to one SLG
D10/D10S write/read device.
Possible configurations of the antennas
The antenna installations described here have been designed for reading smartlabels
(transponders) on goods on conveyor belts, conveyor systems or pallets.
A prerequisite is that there are no magnetically conducting materials (e.g. metal) in the
vicinity of the antenna or the
label.
3&56
6,0$7,&656
352),%86$60[[
6/*'
6/*'6
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
$17'
%DVLFXQLW
$QWHQQD
GLVWULEXWRU
:LGHUDQJH
SRZHUVXSSO\XQLW
:LWK$17'DQWHQQDFDEOHSHUPDQHQWO\DWWDFKHG
$QWHQQDFDEOHP
&RQILJXUDWLRQZLWKDQWHQQDV&DUUDQJHPHQW
&RQILJXUDWLRQZLWKDQWHQQDVWXQQHO
&RQILJXUDWLRQZLWKDQWHQQDVJDWH
$QWHQQD
GLVWULEXWRU
$QWHQQD
GLVWULEXWRU
$QWHQQD
GLVWULEXWRU
$QWHQQD
GLVWULEXWRU
$QWHQQD
GLVWULEXWRU
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 55
Figure 4-16 Possible configuration of SLG D10/D10S with ANT D5/D6/D10
Installation examples
$17'
&RQYH\RUEHOW
PLQPP
PLQPP
Figure 4-17 Installation example with 2 ANT D6 (portal)
$17'
$17'
&RQYH\RUEHOW
Figure 4-18 Installation example with ANT D6 (C arrangement)
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
56 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
$17'
$17'
&RQYH\RUEHOW
Figure 4-19 Installation example with ANT D6 (tunnel)
Note
The minimum spacings between the antennas for operation with only one reader may be
less than the distances described because this configuration has the same phase.
Configuring instructions
The antenna installation described below enables detection of transponders moving
horizontally through the installation. Depending on the installation (antennas exactly opposite
each other or offset in parallel), the label is aligned in parallel with the antennas or arbitrarily.
The size of the sensing range depends on the label alignment:
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 57
NOTICE
It must be noted that the overall sensing range of the antennas is greater than the sensing
range to be configured. This means there can be label alignments where even labels
outside the sensing range will be detected. Labels aligned in parallel with the antennas, for
example, can also be detected at larger distances beside or outside the antenna range.
For this reason, goods with labels must not be stored within a distance of up to 0.5 m from
the installation. If this cannot be complied with, the antennas must be shielded.
To achieve three-dimensional detection of the labels in the sensing range, the following
requirements must be met:
The gate width must be less than or equal to 800 mm.
The antenna size of the labels must be at least the size of an ISO card (85 mm x 54
mm).
The distance from label to label must be greater than 100 mm. The distance from label
to label can be reduced if the gate width is correspondingly reduced. This applies
especially for distances under 50 mm
There must be no more than 16 labels within the sensing range of the antennas at the
same time.
The number of labels can be increased if the gate width is correspondingly reduced and
the maximum speed appropriately adapted.
The maximum speed of the labels must not exceed 1 m/s. (This depends on the number
and alignment of the labels, the number of data blocks to be processed, the data
protocol required and the label type).
To the front and sides of the antenna, there must be a distance of more than 150 mm to
metal parts.
There must be no interference to the write/read device from other electrical equipment in
the surrounding area.
Note
The SLG D10S is not multitag-enabled.
Components required
For installation with
● 2 antennas (gate)
● 3 antennas (C arrangement)
● 4 antennas (tunnel)
the following components are required:
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
58 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Number for installation
with
2 ant. 3 ant. 4 ant.
Component Order No.
1 1 1 Basic unit:
SLG D10 (↔ PC)
SLG D10S ↔ ASM 4xx/RF1xx)
SLG D10S: 6GT2698-1AA00
SLG D10S: 6GT2698-2AA00
optionally:
ASM 452: 6GT2002-0EB20
ASM 473: 6GT2002-0HA10
ASM 475: 6GT2002-0GA10
ASM 456: 6GT2002-0ED00
RF170C: 6GT2002-0HD00/
6GT2002-1HD00
RF180C: 6GT2002-0JD00
RF182C: 6GT2002-0JD10
2 3 4 Antenna ANT D5 / D6 / D10 optionally:
ANT D5: 6GT2698-5AA00
ANT D6: 6GT2698-5AB00
ANT D10: 6GT2698-5AF00
2 3 4 With ANT D5 if required:
spacer kit for ANT D5
6GT2690-0AB00
2 3 4 With ANT D6 if required:
cover
6GT2698-5AD00
1 2 3 Antenna duplexer 6GT2603-0AC00
1 1 1 MOBY wide-range power supply unit
for SIMATIC RF systems
EU: 6GT2898-0AA00
UK: 6GT2898-0AA10
US: 6GT2898-0AA20
1 1 1 24 V connecting cable,
5 m in length
6GT2491-1HH50
1 1 1 Connecting cable:
SLG D10 ↔ PC
or
SLG D10S ↔ ASM 4xx/RF1xx
6GT2691-0B …
optionally:
6GT2491-0E …
6GT2491-1C …
6GT2691-0F …
6GT2691-0FH20
Installation information
The cables on the antennas and the antenna duplexer are 3.3 m or 10.5 m long respectively.
The write/read device must be installed in the vicinity of the antennas. In the case of larger
distances between the write/read device and the antennas, the antenna cable can be
increased by 7.2 m with the extension (6GT2 691-0DH72). This results in shorter ranges.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 59
Metal-free area
To guarantee perfect functioning of the individual installation versions, all larger metal parts
in the vicinity of the antennas must be removed.
Figure 4-20 Metal-free space _side view (using the example of tunnel arrangement on a conveyor
belt)
$QQWHQDEHORZEDQG
0D[
Figure 4-21 Metal-free space _plan view (using the example of tunnel arrangement on a conveyor
belt)
Metal in the vicinity of the antennas
If metal in the vicinity of the antennas cannot be avoided, the following must be noted:
● There must be a minimum allround gap of 100 mm between the antenna and metal.
Serious loss of sensing range must be expected above 50 mm. There is no discernible
influence at distances greater than 150 mm from the metal.
● The influence of the metal depends heavily on its size and shape. Thin metal rods have
less influence on the magnetic field than large surfaces.
● Larger metal surfaces (edge length > 50 mm) in parallel with the antennas or labels result
in a short-circuit of the magnetic lines of force. As a result, the labels cannot be read.
● Metal parts under the conveyor belt change the direction of the magnetic lines of force.
Serious loss of sensing range must be expected as a result. Horizontally aligned labels
cannot be read in such cases.
● The metal parts must not form closed loops or circuits. If necessary, these must be
electrically interrupted at one point.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.3 Installation guidelines
MOBY D
60 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
● The metal parts in the immediate vicinity of the antenna must be grounded in a mesh with
a good HF connection.
● Since the write/read device is installed in a metal housing, and the antennas can couple
into the cables to the write/read device, it must be installed at a distance of at least 500
mm from the antennas.
Notes on installing and laying the antenna cable
To suppress possible interference, an EMC hinged ferrite choke must be fitted to the
antenna cables (as well as the antenna cable between the SLG and the antenna duplexer).
The coaxial cable must be wound tightly at least four times through the EMC ring core. The
maximum distance between the connecting plug for the write/read device or the antenna
duplexer and the ring core must be 100 mm.
The antenna cable must always be run vertically from the antennas. A minimum distance of
200 mm to the antennas must be observed with further cable routing.
Otherwise, performance losses must be expected.
There must be a distance of at least 300 mm between antenna cables and parallel power
cables.
Unrequired cable length must be secured in a bundle with a diameter of 100 to 150 mm.
If the standard antenna cable is too short, it can be increased by 7.20 m with the extension.
Slight range losses must be expected here.
To achieve optimal read ranges, the antenna cable should not be shortened or lengthened.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.4 Chemical resistance of the MDS
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 61
4.4 Chemical resistance of the MDS
MDS D100 (6GT2600-0AD10)
The enclosure of the MDS D100 is made of PC (polycarbonate).
MDS D100 is resistant to the substances specified in the following table.
Table 4- 20 Chemical resistance of MDS D100
Substance Evaluation
Acetone □
Alcohol ◪
Aliphatic hydrocarbons ■
Aromatic hydrocarbons □
Hot water (hydrolysis resistance) □
Mineral lubricants ◪
Oxidizing acids □
Perchloroethylene □
Petroleum spirit □
Strong alkalis □
Strong mineral acids ◪
Strong organic acids ◪
Trichloroethylene □
Weak alkalis □
Weak mineral acids ■
Weak organic acids ■
Abbreviations:
■ Resistant
◪ Limited resistance
□ Not resistant
Planning the MOBY D system
4.4 Chemical resistance of the MDS
MOBY D
62 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
MDS D100 (6GT2600-0AD00) and
MDS D200
The enclosure of the MDS is made of PVC.
The MDS are resistant to the substances specified in the following table.
Table 4- 21 Chemical resistance of MDS D100/D200
Substance Concentration
Acetic acid, aqueous solution 5%
Ethanol, aqueous solution 60%
Ethylene glycol 50%
Fuel B according to ISO 1817
Human sweat
Saline solution 5%
Sodium carbonate, aqueous solution 5%
Sugared water 10%
(Reference: ISO 10373 / ISO 7810)
Planning the MOBY D system
4.4 Chemical resistance of the MDS
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 63
MDS D139 (6GT2600-0AA10)
MDS D124 (6GT2600-0AC10)
MDS D160 (6GT2600-0AB10)
The housing of the heat-resistant data storage unit MDS D139 is made of polyphenylene
sulfide (PPS). The chemical resistance of the data storage unit is excellent. No solvent is
known that can dissolve the plastic at temperatures below 200 °C. A reduction in the
mechanical properties has been observed in aqueous solutions of hydrochloric acid (HCl)
and nitric acid (HNO3) at 80 °C.
The excellent resistance to all fuel types including methanol is a particular characteristic. The
following table provides an overview of the chemicals investigated.
Table 4- 22 Chemical resistance of MDS D139, MDS D124, MDS D160
Test conditions
Substance
Time
[days]
Temperature
[°C]
Evaluation
(FAM-DIN 51604-A)
Toluol
180 80 /
1, 1, 1-trichloroethane
xylene
180 80 +
Acetone 180 55 +
Anti-freeze 180 120 +
Brake fluid 40 80 +
Butanon-2 (methyl ethyl ketone) 180 60 +
Calcium chloride (saturated) 40 80 +
Caustic soda (30 percent) 40 93 +
Diesel fuel 180 80 +
Diethyl ether 40 23 +
Engine oil 40 80 +
Frigen 113 40 23 +
Hydrochloric acid (10 percent) 40 80 -
Kerosine 40 60 +
Methanol 180 60 +
n-Butanol (butyl alcohol) 180 80 +
n-butyl acetate 180 80 +
Nitric acid (10 percent) 40 23 +
Sodium chloride (saturated) 40 80 +
Sodium hydroxide (30 percent) 180 80 +
Sodium hypochlorite (5 percent) 30
180
80
80
/
-
Sulphuric acid
(10 percent)
(10 percent)
(30 percent)
40
40
40
23
80
23
+
/
+
Planning the MOBY D system
4.4 Chemical resistance of the MDS
MOBY D
64 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Test conditions Substance
Time
[days]
Temperature
[°C]
Evaluation
Tested fuels: 40 80 +
Zinc chloride (saturated) 180
180
180
40
80
75
80
80
/
+
+
+
Assessment:
+ Resistant, weight gain < 3 % or weight loss < 0.5 % and/or reduction in fracture resistance < 15
%
/ Limited resistance, weight gain 3 to 8 % or weight loss 0.5 to 3 % and/or reduction in fracture
resistance 15 to 30 %
- Not resistant, weight gain > 8 % or weight loss > 3 % and/or reduction in fracture resistance > 30
%
Planning the MOBY D system
4.4 Chemical resistance of the MDS
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 65
MDS D124 (6GT2600-0AC00)
MDS D324
MDS D424
MDS D460
The enclosure of the MDS is made of epoxy resin. The following table provides an overview
of the chemical resistance.
Table 4- 23 Chemical resistance of MDS D124, MDS D324, MDS D424, MDS D460
Chemical compound Concentration 20 °C 40 °C 60 °C
Acetic acid 100 % ◪
Ammonia liquid, water-free □
Benzol, benzoic acid ■
Borax ■
Boric acid ■
Brine □
Bromine, liquid, bromine water □
Butyric acid 100 % ◪
Carbonate (ammonium, sodium, etc.) ■
Chlorine water (saturated solution) ◪
Chlorine, liquid □
Chlorobenzene ■
Chloroform □
Chromate (potassium, sodium, etc.) Up to 50% ■
Chromic acid Up to 30 % □
Citric acid ■
Cyanide (potassium, sodium, etc.) ■
Diethylene glycol ■
Dioxane □
Ethanol ■ ■
Fixer ■
Fluoride (ammonium, potassium, sodium, etc.) ■
Formaldehyde 50 % ■
Formic acid 50 % ■
Gasoline, aromatic-free/containing benzol ■
Glycerine ■
Glycol ■
Hydrochloric acid, nitric acid 10 % □
Hydrofluoric acid Up to 40 % ■
Hydrogen peroxide 30 % ■
Hydroxide (sodium, potassium) 40 % ■
Iodide (potassium, sodium, etc.) ■
Lactic acid 100 % ◪
Methanol 100 % ■
Mineral oils ■
Planning the MOBY D system
4.4 Chemical resistance of the MDS
MOBY D
66 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Chemical compound Concentration 20 °C 40 °C 60 °C
Nitrate (ammonium, potassium, etc.) ■
Nitroglycerine □
Phosphate (ammonium, sodium, etc.) ■
Phosphoric acid 50 % ■
Propanol ■
Silicic acid ■
Soap solution ■
Sulfide (ammonium, sodium, etc.) □
Sulphate (ammonium, sodium, etc.) ■
Sulphur dioxide 100 % ◪
Sulphuric acid 40 % □
Tartaric acid ■
Trichloroethylene □
Turpentine ■
Urine, uric acid ■
Abbreviations:
■ Resistant
◪ Limited resistance
□ Not resistant
Planning the MOBY D system
4.4 Chemical resistance of the MDS
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 67
MDS D428
The enclosure of the MDS D428 comprises:
the hood: PA6.6 GF30
the screw: Stainless steel
The MDS D428 is resistant to the substances specified in the following table.
Table 4- 24 Chemical resistance of MDS D428
Substance Concentration
Acetone ■
Alcohol ■
Aliphatic hydrocarbons ■
Aromatic hydrocarbons ■
Hot water (hydrolysis resistance) ◪
Mineral lubricants ■
Oxidizing acids □
Perchloroethylene ■
Petroleum spirit ■
Strong alkalis □
Strong mineral acids □
Strong organic acids □
Trichloroethylene ■
Weak alkalis ◪
Weak mineral acids ◪
Weak organic acids ◪
Abbreviations:
■ Resistant
◪ Limited resistance
□ Not resistant
Planning the MOBY D system
4.5 EMC Guidelines
MOBY D
68 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
4.5 EMC Guidelines
4.5.1 Overview
These EMC Guidelines answer the following questions:
● Why are EMC guidelines necessary?
● What types of external interference have an impact on the system?
● How can interference be prevented?
● How can interference be eliminated?
● Which standards relate to EMC?
● Examples of interference-free plant design
The description is intended for "qualified personnel":
● Project engineers and planners who plan system configurations with RFID modules and
have to observe the necessary guidelines.
● Fitters and service engineers who install the connecting cables in accordance with this
description or who rectify defects in this area in the event of interference.
NOTICE
Failure to observe notices drawn to the reader's attention can result in dangerous
conditions in the plant or the destruction of individual components or the entire plant.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.5 EMC Guidelines
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 69
4.5.2 What does EMC mean?
The increasing use of electrical and electronic devices is accompanied by:
● Higher component density
● More switched power electronics
● Increasing switching rates
● Lower power consumption of components due to steeper switching edges
The higher the degree of automation, the greater the risk of interaction between devices.
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical or electronic device to
operate satisfactorily in an electromagnetic environment without affecting or interfering with
the environment over and above certain limits.
EMC can be broken down into three different areas:
● Intrinsic immunity to interference:
immunity to internal electrical disturbance
● Immunity to external interference:
immunity to external electromagnetic disturbance
● Degree of interference emission:
emission of interference and its effect on the electrical environment
All three areas are considered when testing an electrical device.
The RFID modules are tested for conformity with the limit values required by the CE and
RTTE guidelines. Since the RFID modules are merely components of an overall system, and
sources of interference can arise as a result of combining different components, certain
guidelines have to be followed when setting up a plant.
EMC measures usually consist of a complete package of measures, all of which need to be
implemented in order to ensure that the plant is immune to interference.
Note
The plant manufacturer is responsible for the observance of the EMC guidelines; the plant
operator is responsible for radio interference suppression in the overall plant.
All measures taken when setting up the plant prevent expensive retrospective modifications
and interference suppression measures.
The plant operator must comply with the locally applicable laws and regulations. They are
not covered in this document.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.5 EMC Guidelines
MOBY D
70 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
4.5.3 Basic rules
It is often sufficient to follow a few elementary rules in order to ensure electromagnetic
compatiblity (EMC).
The following rules must be observed:
Shielding by enclosure
● Protect the device against external interference by installing it in a cabinet or housing.
The housing or enclosure must be connected to the chassis ground.
● Use metal plates to shield against electromagnetic fields generated by inductances.
● Use metal connector housings to shield data conductors.
Wide-area ground connection
● Plan a meshed grounding concept.
● Bond all passive metal parts to chassis ground, ensuring large-area and low-HF-
impedance contact.
● Establish a large-area connection between the passive metal parts and the central
grounding point.
● Don't forget to include the shielding bus in the chassis ground system. That means the
actual shielding busbars must be connected to ground by large-area contact.
● Aluminium parts are not suitable for ground connections.
Plan the cable installation
● Break the cabling down into cable groups and install these separately.
● Always route power cables, signal cables and HF cables through separated ducts or in
separate bundles.
● Feed the cabling into the cabinet from one side only and, if possible, on one level only.
● Route the signal cables as close as possible to chassis surfaces.
● Twist the feed and return conductors of separately installed cables.
● Routing HF cables:
avoid parallel routing of HF cables.
● Do not route cables through the antenna field.
Shielding for the cables
● Shield the data cables and connect the shield at both ends.
● Shield the analog cables and connect the shield at one end, e.g. on the drive unit.
● Always apply large-area connections between the cable shields and the shielding bus at
the cabinet inlet and make the contact with clamps.
● Feed the connected shield through to the module without interruption.
● Use braided shields, not foil shields.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.5 EMC Guidelines
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 71
Line and signal filter
● Use only line filters with metal housings
● Connect the filter housing to the cabinet chassis using a large-area low-HF-impedance
connection.
● Never fix the filter housing to a painted surface.
● Fix the filter at the control cabinet inlet or in the direction of the source.
4.5.4 Propagation of electromagnetic interference
Three components have to be present for interference to occur in a system:
● Interference source
● Coupling path
● Interference sink
HJFRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
,QWHUIHUHQFHVRXUFH
GHYLFHHPLWWLQJ
LQWHUIHUHQFH
&RXSOLQJSDWK
HJGULYHXQLW HJUHDGHU
,QWHUIHUHQFHVLQN
GHYLFHDIIHFWHGE\
LQWHUIHUHQFH
Figure 4-22 Propagation of interference
If one of the components is missing, e.g. the coupling path between the interference source
and the interference sink, the interference sink is unaffected, even if the interference source
is transmitting a high level of noise.
The EMC measures are applied to all three components, in order to prevent malfunctions
due to interference. When setting up a plant, the manufacturer must take all possible
measures in order to prevent the occurrence of interference sources:
● Only devices fulfilling limit class A of VDE 0871 may be used in a plant.
● Interference suppression measures must be introduced on all interference-emitting
devices. This includes all coils and windings.
● The design of the system must be such that mutual interference between individual
components is precluded or kept as small as possible.
Information and tips for plant design are given in the following sections.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.5 EMC Guidelines
MOBY D
72 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Interference sources
In order to achieve a high level of electromagnetic compatibility and thus a very low level of
disturbance in a plant, it is necessary to recognize the most frequent interference sources.
These must then be eliminated by appropriate measures.
Table 4- 25 Interference sources: origin and effect
Interference source Interference results from Effect on the interference sink
Contacts System disturbances Contactors,
electronic valves Coils Magnetic field
Collector Electrical field Electrical motor
Winding Magnetic field
Contacts Electrical field Electric welding device
Transformer Magnetic field, system disturbance,
transient currents
Power supply unit, switched-
mode
Circuit Electrical and magnetic field, system
disturbance
High-frequency appliances Circuit Electromagnetic field
Transmitter
(e.g. service radio)
Antenna Electromagnetic field
Ground or reference potential
difference
Voltage difference Transient currents
Operator Static charge Electrical discharge currents, electrical
field
Power cable Current flow Electrical and magnetic field, system
disturbance
High-voltage cable Voltage difference Electrical field
Planning the MOBY D system
4.5 EMC Guidelines
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 73
What interference can affect RFID?
Interference source Cause Remedy
Switched-mode power supply Interference emitted from the
current infeed
Replace the power supply
Ferrite in the supply line
Cable is inadequately
shielded
Better cable shielding Interference injected through
the cables connected in
series The reader is not connected
to ground.
Ground the reader
caused by another reader Position the antennas further
apart.
Erect suitable damping materials
between the antennas.
Reduce the power of the readers.
Please note the instructions in the
Section
Installation
guidelines/reducing the influence of
metal
HF interference over the
antennas
from external noise sources
(frequency converters,
fluorescent lamps, etc.)
Minimize sources of noise
Shield
Compensation
Point-to-point grounding
Planning the MOBY D system
4.5 EMC Guidelines
MOBY D
74 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Coupling paths
A coupling path has to be present before the disturbance emitted by the interference source
can affect the system. There are four ways in which interference can be coupled in:
,
1
7
(
5
)
(
5
(
1
&
(
6
,
1
.
*DOYDQLFFRXSOLQJSDWK
&DSDFLWLYHFRXSOLQJSDWK
,QGXFWLYHFRXSOLQJSDWK
5DGLDWLRQFRXSOLQJ
5),'
5HDGHU
5),'
5HDGHU
5),'
5HDGHU
5),'
5HDGHU
,
1
7
(
5
)
(
5
(
1
&
(
6
2
8
5
&
(
Figure 4-23 Ways in which interference can be coupled in
When RFID modules are used, different components in the overall system can act as a
coupling path:
Table 4- 26 Causes of coupling paths
Coupling path Invoked by
Conductors and cables Incorrect or inappropriate installation
Missing or incorrectly connected shield
Inappropriate physical arrangement of cables
Control cabinet or housing Missing or incorrectly wired equalizing conductor
Missing or incorrect earthing
Inappropriate physical arrangement
Components not mounted securely
Unfavorable cabinet configuration
Planning the MOBY D system
4.5 EMC Guidelines
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 75
4.5.5 Cabinet configuration
The influence of the user in the configuration of an electromagnetically compatible plant
encompasses cabinet configuration, cable installation, ground connections and correct
shielding of cables.
Note
For information about electromagnetically compatible cabinet configuration, please consult
the installation guidelines for SIMATIC PLCs.
Shielding by enclosure
Magnetic and electrical fields and electromagnetic waves can be kept away from the
interference sink by using a metal enclosure. The easier the induced interference current can
flow, the greater the intrinsic weakening of the interference field. All enclosures and metal
panels in the cabinet should therefore be connected in a manner allowing good
conductance.
Figure 4-24 Shielding by enclosure
If the control cabinet panels are insulated from each other, a high-frequency-conducting
connection can be established using ribbon cables and high-frequency terminals or HF
conducting paste. The larger the area of the connection, the greater the high-frequency
conductivity. This is not possible using single-wire connections.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.5 EMC Guidelines
MOBY D
76 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Prevention of interference by optimum configuration
Good interference suppression can be achieved by installing SIMATIC PLCs on conducting
mounting plates (unpainted). When setting up the control cabinet, interference can be
prevented easily by observing certain guidelines. Power components (transformers, drive
units, load power supply units) should be arranged separately from the control components
(relay control unit, SIMATIC S7).
As a rule:
● The effect of the interference decreases as the distance between the interference source
and interference sink increases.
● The interference can be further decreased by installing grounded shielding plates.
● The load connections and power cables should be installed separately from the signal
cables with a minimum clearance of 10 cm.
3RZHUVXSSO\
&&(8
'ULYH
6KLHOG
SODWH
Figure 4-25 Prevention of interference by optimum configuration
Planning the MOBY D system
4.5 EMC Guidelines
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 77
Filtering of the supply voltage
External interference from the mains can be prevented by installing line filters. Correct
installation is extremely important, in addition to appropriate dimensioning. It is essential that
the line filter is mounted directly at the cabinet inlet. As a result, interference is filtered
promptly at the inlet, and is not conducted through the cabinet.
/LQHILOWHU
,V
&RUUHFW
/LQHILOWHU
,QFRUUHFW
,F LQWHUIHUHQFHFXUUHQW
,V
Figure 4-26 Filtering of the supply voltage
Planning the MOBY D system
4.5 EMC Guidelines
MOBY D
78 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
4.5.6 Prevention of interference sources
A high level of immunity to interference can be achieved by avoiding interference sources.
All switched inductances are frequent sources of interference in plants.
Suppression of inductance
Relays, contactors, etc. generate interference voltages and must therefore be suppressed
using one of the circuits below.
Even with small relays, interference voltages of up to 800 V occur on 24 V coils, and
interference voltages of several kV occur on 230 V coils when the coil is switched. The use
of freewheeling diodes or RC circuits prevents interference voltages and thus stray
interference on conductors installed parallel to the coil conductor.
9DOYHV
%UDNHV
5HOD\FRLOV
&RQWDFWRUV
Figure 4-27 Suppression of inductance
Note
All coils in the cabinet should be suppressed. The valves and motor brakes are frequently
forgotten. Fluorescent lamps in the control cabinet should be tested in particular.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.5 EMC Guidelines
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 79
4.5.7 Equipotential bonding
Potential differences between different parts of a plant can arise due to the different design
of the plant components and different voltage levels. If the plant components are connected
across signal cables, transient currents flow across the signal cables. These transient
currents can corrupt the signals.
Proper equipotential bonding is thus essential.
● The equipotential bonding conductor must have a sufficiently large cross section (at least
10 mm2).
● The distance between the signal cable and the associated equipotential bonding
conductor must be as small as possible (antenna effect).
● A fine-strand conductor must be used (better high-frequency conductivity).
● When connecting the equipotential bonding conductors to the centralized equipotential
bonding strip (EBS), the power components and non-power components must be
combined.
● The equipotential bonding conductors of the separate modules must lead directly to the
equipotential bonding strip.
&DELQHW &DELQHW
,QFRUUHFW
3RZHUVXSSO\
'ULYH
'HYLFH
3/&
(%6
'HYLFH
'HYLFH
,QFRUUHFW
Figure 4-28 Equipotential bonding (EBS = Equipotential bonding strip)
The better the equipotential bonding in a plant, the smaller the chance of interference due to
fluctuations in potential.
Equipotential bonding should not be confused with protective earthing of a plant. Protective
earthing prevents the occurrence of excessive shock voltages in the event of equipment
faults whereas equipotential bonding prevents the occurrence of differences in potential.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.5 EMC Guidelines
MOBY D
80 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
4.5.8 Ground-fault monitoring with MOBY
6/*
9
9
$60
/
/ದ
5
55
5
1RQJURXQGHG
SRZHUVXSSO\XQLW
*URXQGIDXOWPRQLWRULQJGHYLFH
,IDYROWDJHLPEDODQFHRFFXUVRQFRQGXFWRUV/RU/
ZLWKUHIHUHQFHWRJURXQGWKHFLUFXLWZLOOEH
LQWHUUXSWHG
,QWHUIDFHWRFRPSXWHURU3&
)RUFRQQHFWLQJWRDJURXQGHGFRPSXWHU
RU3&JDOYDQLFGHFRXSOLQJHJRSWRFRXSOHUV
PXVWH[LVWLQWKHFRQQHFWLRQ
Figure 4-29 Schematic diagram of ground-fault monitoring
Planning the MOBY D system
4.5 EMC Guidelines
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 81
4.5.9 Cable shielding
Signal cables must be shielded in order to prevent coupling of interference.
The best shielding is achieved by installing the cables in steel tubes. However, this is only
necessary if the signal cable is routed through an environment prone to particular
interference. It is usually adequate to use cables with braided shields. In either case,
however, correct connection is vital for effective shielding.
Note
An unconnected or incorrectly connected shield has no shielding effect.
As a rule:
● For analog signal cables, the shield should be connected at one end on the receiver side
● For digital signals, the shield should be connected to the enclosure at both ends
● Since interference signals are frequently within the HF range (> 10 kHz), a large-area HF-
proof shield contact is necessary
Figure 4-30 Cable shielding
The shielding bus should be connected to the control cabinet enclosure in a manner allowing
good conductance (large-area contact) and must be situated as close as possible to the
cable inlet. The cable insulation must be removed and the cable clamped to the shielding
bus (high-frequency clamp) or secured using cable ties. Care should be taken to ensure that
the connection allows good conductance.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.5 EMC Guidelines
MOBY D
82 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5HPRYHSDLQW
&DEOHWLH
Figure 4-31 Connection of shielding bus
The shielding bus must be connected to the PE busbar.
If shielded cables have to be interrupted, the shield must be continued via the corresponding
connector housing. Only suitable connectors may be used for this purpose.
6KLHOGWXUQHGXSVLGHGRZQ
WKURXJKrDQG
FRQQHFWHGWRFRQQHFWRU
KRXVLQJ
5XEEHUVOHHYH
Figure 4-32 Interruption of shielded cables
If intermediate connectors, which do not have a suitable shield connection, are used, the
shield must be continued by fixing cable clamps at the point of interruption. This ensures a
large-area, HF-conducting contact.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.6 MOBY shield concept
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 83
4.6 MOBY shield concept
In MOBY, the data are transferred between the ASM and SLG at different baudrates over an
RS 422 interface. The distance between the ASM and SLG can be up to 1000 m. In terms of
cabling, MOBY must be handled in the same manner as a data processing system.
Particular attention must be paid to the shield route for all data cables. In the following
drawings, the most important aspects of reliable installation are shown.
9
ದ
ป
9
2WKHU6/*V
7KHFDEOHVKLHOGLV
FRQQHFWHGWRWKH
UHOHYDQWVKLHOGSLQRQ
WKH6/*FRQQHFWRU
7KHFDEOHVKLHOGPXVW
QRWEHFRQQHFWHGWRD
JURXQGHGFRPSRQHQWRQ
WKH6/*JURXQGLQJFODPS
(YHU\FDELQHWLV
FHQWUDOO\JURXQGHG
7KHFDVLQJRIWKH6/*FDEOHPXVWEHFXWGLUHFWO\DWWKH
FDEOHLQOHW7KHFDEOHVKLHOGLVFRQQHFWHGWRWKHJURXQG
UDLOE\PHDQVRIDVKLHOGWHUPLQDO
)DXOWYROWDJHVRIsN9RQWKH6/*FDEOHFDQWKHQ
EHUHOLDEO\GHIOHFWHG:LWKORQJFDEOHVRULQDKLJKLQWHUIHUHQFH
LQGXVWULDOHQYLURQPHQWFDUHIXOFRQQHFWLRQRIWKHVKLHOGLV
LPSRUWDQW
6KLHOGFRQQHFWLQJHOHPHQWIRUDOOVKLHOGHGFDEOHV,WPXVWEHORFDWHGDVQHDU
DVSRVVLEOHWRWKHFDEOHHQWU\SRLQWLQWKHFDELQHW7KHJURXQGFRQQHFWLRQ
EHWZHHQWKHUDLODQGWKHFDELQHWPXVWEHPDGHRYHUDVKRUWGLVWDQFHDQG
ODUJHVXUIDFHDUHD
*URXQG
VFUHZ
7KH6/*PXVWEHJURXQGHGDWWKH
JURXQGLQJVFUHZSURYLGHG
Figure 4-33 Basic shield connection
Connection of other modules
To divert fault currents that can occur on the connecting cable on the SLG, the same
procedure must be followed as shown in the figure above.
Planning the MOBY D system
4.6 MOBY shield concept
MOBY D
84 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Configuration of an S7-300 with MOBY
When the SLG is connected to ASM 475, the cable shield must be connected to a shield
terminal. Shield terminals and holding clips are standard components of the product
spectrum of S7-300.
7HUPLQDOHOHPHQW +ROGLQJFOLS
&DEOHWR6/* &DEOHWR6/*
Figure 4-34 Configuration of ASM 475 with shield connecting element
Cable assembly for ASM 475
To achieve electromagnetic compatibility, the SLG cable must be routed via an S7-300
shield connecting element (see previous diagram). The cable shield should be exposed as
shown in the diagram below.
'LPHQVLRQVLQPP
Figure 4-35 Exposure of the cable shield
Planning the MOBY D system
4.7 Cable and connector assignment
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 85
4.7 Cable and connector assignment
The casing of the standard data cable for the SLG used with MOBY is polyurethane (PUR
according to VDE 0250). This provides excellent protection to the cable against oils, acids,
alkalies and hydraulic fluids.
4.7.1 Cable configuration
The cable between the PC and SLG must have three cores and a shield.
The data can be transferred largely independently of the wire diameter over distances of up
to 30 m (depending on the baudrate).
Standard cable recommended by Siemens: LiYC11Y
Grounding of the SLG cable
It is generally recommended that the shield is connected to a ground rail over a large surface
area.
Trailing cable
The SLG can also be connected over a cable suitable for trailing.
Recommended cable type: HPM Paartronic 3340-C-PUR 3 2 0.25.
Power supply for SLG D1x
Power is supplied to the SLG D1x over a 4-pin M12 connector.
It is essential to consider the voltage drop over the supply cable.
The permissible length of the power supply cable depends on the power consumption of the
SLG and the resistance of the connecting cable.
Table 4- 27 Power supply for SLG D1x
SLG D10/SLG D10S SLG D11/SLG D11S
SLG D12/SLG D12S
Rated value
'&9
'&9
Permitted range
'&9s
UL only
(measured at the SLG connector)
'&9s8/RQO\
'&99
(measured at the SLG connector)
Current consumption
Starting current
Operation at 24 V DC
2.8 A/50 ms
0.9 A (4 W setting)
1.4 A (10 W setting)
0,6 A
0,15 A
Planning the MOBY D system
4.7 Cable and connector assignment
MOBY D
86 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
4.7.2 Connector pin assignment for SLG D1x (RS232)
Serial port
Pin Pin, casing side
(9-pin Sub-D connector with screw
locking)
Name
SLG D10/D11/D12 (RS 232)
1 Cable shield
2 TxD Transmit
3 RxD Receive
4 Not assigned
5 Ground (0 V)
6 Not assigned
7 Not assigned
8 Cable shield
9 Not assigned
Housing Not assigned
Note
When metal Sub D casings are used on the SLG side, the casing must be connected to the
cable shield.
Table 4- 28 Ordering data for mating connector for SLG D1x
Order No.
IP 65 mating connector for SLG D1x
9-pin Sub-D connector, female
6GT2490-1AA00
Planning the MOBY D system
4.7 Cable and connector assignment
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 87
Power supply
Pin Pin, casing side
4-pin M12
Name
SLG D1x
1 Ground (0 V)
2 + 24 V
3 + 24 V
3ODQYLHZ
4 Ground (0 V)
Table 4- 29 Ordering data for mating connector for power supply
Order No.
Mating connector for power supply for SLG D1x
4-pin M12 connector, female
6GT2390-1AB00
Planning the MOBY D system
4.7 Cable and connector assignment
MOBY D
88 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
4.7.3 Connector pin assignment for D1xS (RS422)
Serial port
Pin Pin, casing side
(9-pin Sub-D connector with screw
locking)
Name
SLG D1xS (RS 422)
1 Cable shield
2 + Receive
3 + Transmit
4 Not assigned
5 - Transmit
6 - Receive
7 Ground (0 V)
8 Cable shield
9 Not assigned
Housing Not assigned
Note
When metal Sub D casings are used on the SLG side, the casing must be connected to the
cable shield.
Table 4- 30 Ordering data for mating connector for SLG D1xS
Order No.
IP 65 mating connector for SLG D1x
9-pin Sub-D connector, female
6GT2490-1AA00
Planning the MOBY D system
4.7 Cable and connector assignment
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 89
Power supply
Pin Pin, casing side
4-pin M12
Name
SLG D1xS
1 Ground (0 V)
2 + 24 V
3 + 24 V
3ODQYLHZ
4 Ground (0 V)
Table 4- 31 Ordering data for mating connector for power supply
Order No.
Mating connector for power supply for SLG D1x
4-pin M12 connector, female
6GT2390-1AB00
Planning the MOBY D system
4.7 Cable and connector assignment
MOBY D
90 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
4.7.4 Connecting cable
24 V plug-in cable for SLG D1x/D1xS ↔ wide-range power supply unit
6GT2491-1HH50
0FRQQHFWRU
PDOHIRUSRZHU
VXSSO\XQLWVLGH
0IHPDOH
6/*VLGH
P
Figure 4-36 24 V DC plug-in cable for SLG D1x/D1xS and wide-range power supply unit (6GT2 494-
0AA00)
Cable for SLG D1x ↔ PC/RS 232
6GT2691-0BH50
6GT2691-0BN20
SLQVXE'
IHPDOHVFUHZ
ORFNLQJ
SLQVXE'
IHPDOHVFUHZ
ORFNLQJ
3&VLGH 6/*VLGH
&DVLQJ VKLHOG
7['
5['
9
7['
5['
9
P
Figure 4-37 Connecting cable RS 232 PC ↔ SLG D1x
Planning the MOBY D system
4.7 Cable and connector assignment
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 91
Connecting cable SLG D1xS ↔ ASM 452/473
6GT2491-1CH20
6GT2491-1CH50
6GT2491-1CN20
$60VLGH
7ZRSLQ0
FLUFXODUFRQQHFWRUV
SLQVXE'
IHPDOHVFUHZ
ORFNLQJ
6/*VLGH
ZKLWH
%URZQ
JUHHQ
\HOORZ
*UD\
VKLHOG
&DXWLRQ
:KHQPHWDO6XE'FDVLQJVDUHXVHGRQWKH6/*VLGHWKHFDVLQJPXVWEH
FRQQHFWHGWRWKHFDEOHVKLHOG
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
; ;
PPP
Figure 4-38 Connecting cable SLG D1xS ↔ ASM 452/473
Planning the MOBY D system
4.7 Cable and connector assignment
MOBY D
92 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Connecting cable SLG D1xS ↔ ASM 475
6GT2491-0EH50
6GT2491-0EN20
6GT2491-0EN50
&DEOHZLWKZLUHHQGIHUUXOHV
ZKLWH
%URZQ
JUHHQ
\HOORZ
*UD\
VKLHOG
&DEOHVKLHOGH[SRVHG
SLQVXE'
IHPDOHVFUHZ
ORFNLQJ
$60VLGH 6/*VLGH
&DXWLRQ
:KHQPHWDO6XE'FDVLQJVDUHXVHGRQWKH6/*VLGHWKHFDVLQJPXVWEH
FRQQHFWHGWRWKHFDEOHVKLHOG
PPP
Figure 4-39 Connecting cable SLG D1xS ↔ ASM 475
Connecting cable SLG D1xS ↔ ASM 456 / RF170C / RF180C
6GT2691-0FH20
0FRQQHFWRU
PDOH
SLQVXE'
IHPDOHVFUHZ
ORFNLQJ
$60VLGH 6/*VLGH
O
Figure 4-40 Connecting cable SLG D1xS ↔ ASM 456
Planning the MOBY D system
4.7 Cable and connector assignment
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 93
Extension cable SLG D1xS ↔ ASM 456 /RF170C / RF180C
6GT2891-0F...
0FRQQHFWRU
PDOH
0FRQQHFWRU
VRFNHWIRU
FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
$60
*7)+
$60VLGH &RXSOLQJVLGH
O
Figure 4-41 Extension cable SLG D1xS ↔ ASM 456
Antenna connecting cable SLG D10 / SLG D11 / SLG D10S / SLG D11S ↔ ANT Dx
6GT2691-0CH33
6GT2691-0CN10
Figure 4-42 ANT antenna connecting cable SLG D10 / SLG D11 / SLG D10S / SLG D11S ↔ ANT Dx
(3.3 m/10.5 m)
Antenna extension cable
6GT2691-0DH72
Figure 4-43 Antenna extension cable (7.2 m)
Planning the MOBY D system
4.7 Cable and connector assignment
MOBY D
94 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 95
Mobile data storage units 5
5.1 Introduction
Application area
MOBY identification systems support automatic, fast and reliable identification. The
important data accompany the product throughout the complete logistics and transport
process. When fitted to the item to be identified, data can be stored on the MDS contact-free
and either updated or read out contact-free at any point in the material flow process.
Different types of MDS can be selected to suit the specific application. Rugged transponder
construction supports use under harsh industrial conditions at high temperatures and makes
the MDS resistant to many chemical substances.
Design and function
The main components of the mobile data storage unit (MDS) are logic, antenna and
EEPROM. If an MDS moves into the transmission field of the SLG (write/read device), the
necessary power for all circuit components is generated and monitored by means of the
energy supply unit. The pulse-coded information is prepared in such a way that it can be
processed further as pure digital signals. The control unit handles the data and the check
routines.
Mobile data storage units
5.1 Introduction
MOBY D
96 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Overview
Table 5- 1 MDS overview table
MDS Memory size Temperature range
(in operation)
Dimensions
(L x W x H in mm)
Degree
of
protecti
on
MDS D100 EEPROM 128 bytes gross
112 bytes net
-25 to +80 °C 85 x 54 x 0.8 IP68
MDS D124 EEPROM 128 bytes gross
112 bytes net
-25 to +125 °C
(180 °C for 1000 h)
Ø 27 x 4 IP68/X
9K
MDS D139 EEPROM 128 bytes gross
112 bytes net
-25 to +140 °C
(220 °C for 2000 h)
Ø 85 x 15 IP68/X
9K
MDS D160 EEPROM 128 bytes gross
112 bytes net
-25 to +85 °C
(125 °C for 1000 h)
Ø 16 x 3 IP68/X
9K
MDS D165 EEPROM 128 bytes gross
112 bytes net
-25 to +85 °C 85 x 54 x 0.3 IP65
MDS D200 EEPROM 256 bytes gross
256 bytes net
-20 to +60 °C 85 x 54 x 0.6 IP67
MDS D261 EEPROM 256 bytes gross
256 bytes net
-25 to +85 °C 55 x 55 x 0.3 IP65
MDS D324 EEPROM 1024 bytes gross
992 bytes net
-25 to +125 °C Ø 27 x 4 IP67
MDS D424 EEPROM 2048 bytes gross
2000 bytes net
-25 to +85 °C Ø 27 x 4 IP67
MDS D428 EEPROM 2048 bytes gross
2000 bytes net
-25 to +85 °C Ø 27 x 20
SW 22,
M8 thread
IP68/X
9K
MDS D460 EEPROM 2048 bytes gross
2000 bytes net
-25 to +85 °C Ø 16 x 3 IP67/X
9K
Definition of IP67:
● Protection against the ingress of dust (dustproof)
● Complete touch protection
● Protection against water under specified pressure and for specified time
Definition of IP68:
● Protection against the ingress of dust (dustproof)
● Complete touch protection
● The MDS can be submerged in water for long periods; the conditions must be clarified
with the manufacturer.
Mobile data storage units
5.1 Introduction
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 97
Memory allocation of the MDS
Memory division for PC applications of ISO 15693 transponders
The MDS D1xx are based on the NXP I-Code SL2 and have a 128-byte EEPROM memory
that is subdivided into 32 blocks. A block on the transponder is the smallest addressable
memory area and is subdivided into areas of 4 bytes in length for access. 112 bytes (= 28
blocks) can be used by the user.
The MDS D2xx are based on the Texas HF-I and have a 256-byte EEPROM memory that is
subdivided into 64 blocks. A block on the transponder is the smallest addressable memory
area and is subdivided into areas of 4 bytes in length for access. All 256 bytes (= 64 blocks)
can be used by the user.
The MDS D3xx are based on the Infineon SRF55V10P and have a 1024-byte EEPROM
memory that is subdivided into 256 blocks. A block on the transponder is the smallest
addressable memory area and is subdivided into areas of 4 bytes in length for access. 992
bytes (= 248 blocks) can be used by the user.
The MDS D4xx are based on the Fujitsu MB89R118B and have a 2048-byte FRAM memory
that is subdivided into 256 blocks. A block on the transponder is the smallest addressable
memory area and is subdivided into areas of 8 bytes in length for access. 2000 bytes (= 250
blocks) can be used by the user.
Mobile data storage units
5.2 Memory configuration of the ISO tags
MOBY D
98 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.2 Memory configuration of the ISO tags
8VHUDUHD
UHDGZULWH
((3520
,&2'(6/,
E\WH((3520
E\WHEORFNVL]H
7DJLW+),
E\WH((3520
E\WHEORFNVL]H
,QILQHRQP\G
E\WH((3520
E\WHEORFNVL]H
E\WH)5$0
E\WHEORFNVL]H
E\WHV
8,'UHDGRQO\
0'6'
0'6'
0'6'
0'6'
0'6'
0'6'
0'6'
0'6'
0'6'
0'6'
0'6'
)))
)))
')
)
&)
))
)XMLWVX0%5
Figure 5-1 Memory configuration
Memory areas
Depending on the manufacturer of the transponder chip, the memory configuration of an ISO
tag consists of EEPROM memory of varying sizes. Except for transponders that are
equipped with a Fuijtsu 2k FRAM. These are equipped with one FRAM.
The typical sizes are 112 bytes, 256 bytes, 992 bytes or 2000 bytes. Each ISO transponder
chip features an 8-byte unique serial number (UID, read only). This UID is transferred as an
8 byte value through a read command to address FFF0 with a length of 8.
Mobile data storage units
5.3 MDS D100
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 99
5.3 MDS D100
5.3.1 Characteristics
MDS D100 Characteristics
Field of application From simple identification such as electronic
barcode replacement/supplementation, through
warehouse and distribution logistics, right up to
product identification.
Memory EEPROM 128 bytes gross
112 bytes net capacity
Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33).
Mounting on metal Not possible; recommended distance from
metal ≥ 20 mm
ISO standard ISO 15693
5.3.2 Ordering data
Table 5- 2 Ordering data for MDS D100
Order number
MDS D100 6GT2600-0AD10
Table 5- 3 Ordering data for MDS D100 accessory
MDS D100 accessory Order number
Spacers 6GT2190-0AA00
Fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00
Fixing pocket (cannot be mounted directly on metal) 6GT2390-0AA00
5.3.3 Metal-free area
Direct mounting of the MDS D100 on metal is not allowed. A distance of ≥ 20 mm is
recommended. This can be achieved using the spacer 6GT2190-0AA00 in combination with
the fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00.
Mobile data storage units
5.3 MDS D100
MOBY D
100 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Mounting on metal
K
h ≥ 20 mm
① Data memory
② Metal
③ Non-metal
Figure 5-2 Mounting of the MDS D100 on metal with spacer
Flush-mounting
K
D
D
a ≥ 20 mm
h ≥ 20 mm
① Data memory
② Metal
③ Non-metal
Figure 5-3 Flush-mounting of MDS D100 in metal with spacer
Mobile data storage units
5.3 MDS D100
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 101
Note
If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results.
See also
Dimension drawing (Page 105)
5.3.4 Mounting options
Fixing pocket for MDS D100
The fixing pocket is secured on a non-metallic surface with M4 countersunk head screws in
the holes provided.
s
s
s
s
s
Figure 5-4 Fixing pocket 6GT2390-0AA00 for MDS D100
Note
The fixing pocket shown here with Order No.: 6GT2 390-0AA00 is not suitable for use with
the spacer (6GT2 190-0AA00).
Note
When mounting the MDS D100 on metal, it is also possible to use the 6GT2 190-0AB00
fixing pocket, but only in combination with the 6GT2 190-0AA00 spacer.
Mobile data storage units
5.3 MDS D100
MOBY D
102 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Fixing pocket with spacer for MDS D100
6,(0(16
/XJV
+ROGLQJNQREV
0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW*7$%
+ROGLQJEUDFNHW
'LPHQVLRQVNHWFK
6SDFHUV*7$$
0DWHULDO3$
'DWDPHPRU\
6OLGHWUDQVSRQGHULQWRWKHPRXQWLQJ
EUDFNHW7KHWDEVDUHWKHQEHQWE\r
DQGLQVHUWHGLQWRWKHVSDFHU3RVLWLRQ
WKHPRXQWLQJEUDFNHW
VRWKDWLWFRYHUV
WKHWUDQVSRQGHUVHH)LJXUH,WLV
DXWRPDWLFDOO\ORFNHGLQWRSODFH
5HDVVHPEO\LQVWUXFWLRQV
7KHWDEVRIWKHPRXQWLQJEUDFNHWDUHVHFXUHGWRD
QRQPHWDOEDVH7KLVFDQEHGRQH
DVIROORZV
6FUHZVLQWKHKROHVSURYLGHG
5LYHWVLQWKHKROHVSURYLGHG
1DLOVWKURXJKWKHKROHV
6WDSOHVWKURXJKWKHSODVWLFRIWKHWDEV
,QVHUWLRQLQWKHVSDFHU
7KHWDEVFDQDOVREHEHQWE\
r
7KHWUDQVSRQGHU
LVSXVKHG
LQWRWKHPRXQWLQJ
EUDFNHW
/RFNLQJ
WDNHVSODFHZLWK
KROGLQJNQREVLQ
WKHPRXQWLQJ
EUDFNHWZ
6SDFHUV
0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW
7UDQVSRQGHUZLWKPRXQWLQJEUDFNHW 7UDQVSRQGHUZLWKPRXQWLQJEUDFNHWDQG
VSDFHUDVVHPEOHG
7KHVSDFHUFDQEHPRXQWHGGLUHFWO\RQPHWDO7RJHWKHUZLWKWKH
PRXQWLQJEUDFNHWWKLVUHVXOWVLQDGLVWDQFHRIPPEHWZHHQWUDQVSRQGHUDQGPHWDO
0RXQWLQJ
:LWKRUVFUHZV0
:LWKUXEEHUSDGVRQWKHKROGLQJEUDFNHWVHJRQPHVKER[HV
:LWKFDEOHWLHVRQWKHKROGLQJEUDFNHWVHJRQPHVKER[HV
Figure 5-5 Dimensions of the spacer and fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00 for MDS 100
Mobile data storage units
5.3 MDS D100
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 103
Mounting option using drill holes on the MDS
You can also secure the MDS D100 with screws. You must drill the marked holes for this
purpose (see Dimension drawing (Page 105)).
● Drill hole/setting max. 3.5 mm,
● Screw according to DIN 4017: M3, head diameter max. 6 mm
Mobile data storage units
5.3 MDS D100
MOBY D
104 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.3.5 Technical data
Table 5- 4 Technical data for MDS D100
Memory size 128 bytes
Memory configuration
Serial number
Configuration memory
Application memory
8 bytes (fixed code)
8 bytes
112 bytes
Storage technology EEPROM
Memory organization EEPROM 128 bytes gross
112 bytes net capacity
When using the OPT area, 16 bytes of it must be
subtracted in 4 byte blocks
Protocol according to ISO 15693
Data retention (at +40 °C) 10 years
MTBF (at +40 °C) 2 x 106 hours
Read cycles Unlimited
Write cycles, typical 1 000 000
Write cycles, min. 100 000
Read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter .
Distance from metal min. 20 mm (approx. 30% reduction of the field data)
Multitag capability Yes
Power supply Inductive power transmission (without battery)
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP68
Vibration ISO 10373/ISO 7810
Torsion and bending load ISO 10373/ISO 7816-1
Mechanical design
Color
Material
Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm
Laminated plastic card, printable on both sides
White/petrol
PC
85.6 (±0.2) x 54 (±0.2) x 0.9 (±0.05)
Fixing Adhesive, fixing pocket
Ambient temperature
During operation
Transport and storage
-25 °C to +80 °C
-25 °C to +80 °C
Weight, approx. 5 g
Mobile data storage units
5.3 MDS D100
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 105
5.3.6 Dimension drawing
5
s
s s
Dimensions in mm
1) Dimensions for mounting holes
Figure 5-6 MDS D100 dimension drawing
Mobile data storage units
5.4 MDS D124
MOBY D
106 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.4 MDS D124
5.4.1 Characteristics
MDS D124 Characteristics
Field of application Application areas in factory automation (e.g. small paintshops to
180°C)
Memory EEPROM 128 bytes gross
112 bytes net capacity
Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33).
Mounting on metal Not possible:
Recommended distance from metal ≥ 25 mm
Standard ISO 15693
5.4.2 Ordering data
Table 5- 5 Ordering data for MDS D124
Order number
MDS D124 6GT2600-0AC10
5.4.3 Mounting on metal
Mounting on metal
0HWDO
'DWDPHPRU\
1RQPHWDO
K
h ≥ 25 mm
Figure 5-7 Mounting of the MDS D124 on metal with spacer
Mobile data storage units
5.4 MDS D124
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 107
Flush-mounting
0HWDO
1RQPHWDO 'DWDPHPRU\
K
D
h ≥ 25 mm
a ≥ 25 mm
Figure 5-8 Flush-mounting of MDS D124 in metal with spacer
Note
If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is
possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M3 countersunk head screws). This has no
tangible impact on the range.
Mobile data storage units
5.4 MDS D124
MOBY D
108 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.4.4 Technical specifications
Table 5- 6 Technical data for MDS D124
Memory size 128 bytes
Memory configuration
Serial number
Configuration memory
Application memory
8 bytes (fixed code)
8 bytes
112 bytes
Storage technology EEPROM
Memory organization EEPROM 128 bytes gross
112 bytes net capacity
When using the OPT area, 16 bytes of it must be
subtracted in 4 byte blocks
Protocol according to ISO 15693
Data retention (at +40 °C) 10 years
MTBF (at +40 °C) ≥ 1.5 x 106 hours
Read cycles Unlimited
Write cycles at +40 °C, typical 1 000 000
Write cycles, min. 100 000
Read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter Field data (Page 33).
Distance from metal min. 25 mm (approx. 30% reduction of the field data)
Multitag capability Yes
Power supply Inductive power transmission
(without battery)
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP68 1)
IPx9K 2)
Shock according to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M3
Total shock response spectrum, Type II
100 g 3)
Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class
7M3
20 g 3)
Torsion and bending load Not permissible
Enclosure
Dimensions (D x H) in mm
Color
Material
27(±0.2) x 4(±0.2)
Black
Plastic PPS, silicone-free
Fixing Adhesive, M3 screw
Tightening torque at +20 °C ≤ 1 Nm
(at high temperatures, the expansion coefficients of
the materials used must be taken into account)
Mobile data storage units
5.4 MDS D124
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 109
-25 °C to +125 °C Permanent
+125 °C to +140 °C 20% reduction in the limit
distance
During operation
+180 °C 4) Tested up to 5000 hours
or 3000 cycles
Ambient temperature
Transport and
storage
-40 °C to +125 °C
Weight, approx. 5 g
1) 2 hours, 2 m, +20 °C
2) steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 °C
3) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously.
4) Note that no processing is possible at temperatures of +140 °C or higher.
5.4.5 Dimension drawing
s
s
Dimensions in mm
Figure 5-9 Dimension drawing of MDS D124
Mobile data storage units
5.5 MDS D139
MOBY D
110 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.5 MDS D139
5.5.1 Characteristics
MDS D139 Characteristics
Field of application Applications in production logistics and in assembly
lines subject to high temperatures (up to +220 °C)
Typical application areas:
Paintshops and their preparatory treatments)
Primer coat, electrolytic dip area, cataphoresis
with the associated drying furnaces
Top coat area with drying furnaces
Washing areas at temperatures > 85 °C
Other applications with higher temperatures
Memory EEPROM 128 bytes gross
112-byte user memory
Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33).
Mounting on metal With spacer;
recommended distance from metal ≥ 30 mm
ISO standard ISO 15693
High degree of protection IP68, IPx9K
Material Plastic PPS; silicone-free
5.5.2 Ordering data
Table 5- 7 Ordering data for MDS D139
Order number
MDS D139 6GT2600-0AA10
Table 5- 8 Ordering data for MDS D139 accessory
MDS D139 accessory Order number
Spacers
Diameter x height: 85 mm x 30 mm
6GT2690-0AA00
Mobile data storage units
5.5 MDS D139
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 111
5.5.3 Mounting on metal
CAUTION
Damage to the MDS due to improper mounting
For mounting with the spacer (6GT2690-0AA00), use a stainless steel M5 screw to avoid
damaging the MDS in high temperatures (expansion coefficients).
In higher temperatures (> +80 °C), observe the expansion coefficients of all materials in
order to prevent damage to the MDS due to fastening.
KุPP
)OXVKPRXQWLQJRIWKH0'6LQPHWDOLVQRWSHUPLWWHG
0RXQWLQJRQPHWDO
'DWDVWRUDJH
XQLW
6SDFHU
0HWDO
PP
Figure 5-10 Metal-free area for MDS D139
5HWDLQLQJEROW
6SDFHU
0'6'
Figure 5-11 MDS D139: Mounting recommended with spacer
Mobile data storage units
5.5 MDS D139
MOBY D
112 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Note
If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is
possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M5). This has no tangible impact on the
range. It is recommended that a test is performed in critical applications.
Mobile data storage units
5.5 MDS D139
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 113
5.5.4 Technical specifications
Table 5- 9 Technical data for MDS D139
Memory size 128 bytes
Memory configuration
Serial number
Configuration memory
Application memory
8 bytes (fixed code)
8 bytes
112 bytes
Storage technology EEPROM
Memory organization See MOBY D System Manual,
Chapter 5.1, "Mobile Data Storage Units, Introduction",
section "Memory Allocation"
Data retention 10 years
MTBF 2 x 106 hours
Read cycles Unlimited
Write cycles at +40 °C
minimum
typical
100 000
1.000.000
Read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter Field data (Page 33).
Distance from metal min. 30 mm (approx. 30% reduction of the field data)
Multitag capability Yes
Power supply Inductive power transmission
(without battery)
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP68 1)
IPx9K 2)
Shock according to EN 60721-3-7, Class
7M3
Total shock response spectrum, Type II
50 g
Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class
7M3
20 g
Torsion and bending load Not permissible
Enclosure dimensions
Dimensions (D x H) in mm
Color
Material
85 (±0.5) x 15 (-1.0)
Black
Plastic PPS, silicone-free
Fixing 3 x M5 screw 1)
Tightening torque 1,5 Nm 4)
Mobile data storage units
5.5 MDS D139
MOBY D
114 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
-25 °C to +100 °C Permanent
+120 °C to +140 °C 20% reduction in the limit
distance
+200 °C 5) Tested up to 5000 hours or
3000 cycles
During
operation
+220 °C Tested up to 2000 hours or
1500 cycles
Ambient temperature
Transport
and storage -40 °C to +100 °C
Weight Approx. 50 g
1) 2 hours, 2 m, +20 °C
2) steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 °C
3) For mounting with the spacer (6GT2690-0AA00), use a stainless steel M5 screw to avoid
damaging the MDS in high temperatures (expansion coefficient).
4) In higher temperatures (> +80 °C), observe the expansion coefficient of all materials in order to
prevent damage to the MDS due to fastening.
5) Note that no processing is possible at temperatures of +140 °C or higher.
5.5.5 Use of the MDS D139 in potentially explosive environments
The MDS D139 mobile data memory is classed as a piece of simple, electrical equipment
and can be operated in Protection Zone 2, Device Group II, Category 3G.
The following requirements of the Directive 94/9/EC are fulfilled:
EN 60079-0 :2006
EN 60079-15 : 2005
Identification
II 3 G Ex nA II T2
KEMA 09 ATEX 0133 X
Ta: -25 ... +220°C
WARNING
Gefahr durch elektrostatische Entladungen
Potential electrostatic charging hazard
Danger potentiel de charges électrostatiques
Mobile data storage units
5.5 MDS D139
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 115
NOTICE
Installations- und Betriebsbedingungen für den Ex-Schutzbereich:
a) Der Einsatz des Gerätes in der Nähe von stark ladungserzeugenden Prozessen ist
untersagt.
b) Das Gerät ist mechanisch geschützt zu montieren.
c) Die Montage muss auf einem geerdeten, leitenden Untergrund erfolgen.
d) Die Reinigung darf nur mit feuchtem Tuch erfolgen.
Installation and operating conditions for hazardous areas:
a) Use of the equipment in the vicinity of processes generating high charges is not allowed.
b) The equipment must be mechanically protected when installed.
c) Installation must be performed on a grounded and conductive mounting surface.
d) Cleaning only with a wet cloth.
Conditions d'installation et de mise en oeuvre pour la zone de protection Ex :
a) L'utilisation de l'appareil près de processus générant de fortes charges est interdite.
b) L'appareil doit être monté de manière à être protégé mécaniquement.
c) Le montage doit être effectué sur un socle conducteur mis à la terre.
d) Nettoyage uniquement avec un chiffon humide.
Mobile data storage units
5.5 MDS D139
MOBY D
116 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.5.6 Dimensional drawing
s
s
s
s
s
s
Dimensions in mm
Figure 5-12 Dimensional drawing MDS D139
5.5.7 Cleaning the mobile data memory
NOTICE
Do not clean the transponder with mechanical tools, sand-blasting or pressure hose. These
cleaning methods result in damage to the transponder.
Clean the transponder only with the chemical cleansing agents listed in Chapter .
Mobile data storage units
5.6 MDS D160
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 117
5.6 MDS D160
5.6.1 Characteristics
MDS D160 Characteristics
Field of application Typical applications are, for example:
Rented work clothing
Hotel laundry
Surgical textiles
Hospital clothing
Dirt collection mats
Clothing for nursing homes/hostels
Memory EEPROM 128 bytes gross
112 bytes net capacity
Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33).
Mounting on metal Not possible:
Recommended distance from metal ≥ 25 mm
High resistance Thanks to its rugged packaging, the MDS D160 is a
transponder that can be used under extreme environmental
conditions. It is washable, heat-resistant and resistant to all
chemicals generally used in the laundry process.
ISO standard ISO 15693
5.6.2 Ordering data
Table 5- 10 Ordering data for MDS D160
Order number
MDS D160 6GT2600-0AB10
Mobile data storage units
5.6 MDS D160
MOBY D
118 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.6.3 Mounting on metal
Mounting on metal
1RQPHWDO
0HWDO
'DWDPHPRU\
K
h ≥ 25 mm
Figure 5-13 Mounting of the MDS D160 on metal with spacer
Note
If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results.
In critical applications, it is recommended that a test is performed.
Flush-mounting
Flush-mounting of the MDS D160 in metal is not permitted!
Mobile data storage units
5.6 MDS D160
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 119
5.6.4 Technical specifications
Memory size 128 bytes
Memory configuration
Serial number
Configuration memory
Application memory
8 bytes (fixed code)
8 bytes
112 bytes
Storage technology EEPROM
Memory organization EEPROM 128 bytes gross
112 bytes net capacity
When using the OPT area, 16 bytes of it must be
subtracted in 4 byte blocks
Protocol According to ISO 15693
Data retention (at +55 °C) 10 years
MTBF (at +40 °C) 2 x 106 hours
Bulk detection/multitag capability Yes
Data retention 10 years
Read cycles Unlimited
Write cycles at + 40 °C, typical 1 000 000
Write cycles, min. 100 000
Read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter Field data (Page 33)
Distance from metal Min. 25 mm (approx. 30% reduction of the field
data)
Power supply Inductive power transmission
(without battery)
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP68 (24 hours, 2 m, +20 °C)
Shock, tested in accordance with IEC 68-2-27 40 g
(18 ms; 6 axes; 2000 repeats/h)
Vibration, tested in accordance with IEC 68-2-6 10 g
(10 to 2000 Hz; 3 axes; 2.5 h)
Torsion and bending load Not permissible
Mechanical strength
Isostatic pressure
Axial pressure
Radial pressure
300 bar for 5 min
1000 N for 10 s
1000 N for 10 s
Resistance to chemicals All chemicals normally used in the washing
process
MDS lifespan At least 100 wash cycles
Mechanical design
Color
Material
Dimensions (D x H) in mm
White
PPS, pressed, impact-resistant plastic
16(±0.2) x 3,0(±0.2)
MDS fixing Patch, sew, glue
Mobile data storage units
5.6 MDS D160
MOBY D
120 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
-25 °C to +85 °C Permanent
+125 °C
for 1000 hours
(20% reduction in the
limit distance)
+175 °C 1) 500 x for 10 minutes
During operation
+220 °C 1) 1 x for 30 seconds
Ambient temperature
Transport and
storage
-25 °C to +100 °C
Weight, approx. 1 g
1) No processing possible from +140 °C upwards
Note
Regeneration time for the MDS D160 between wash cycles must be at least 24 hours
It is recommended that a test is performed in critical applications.
5.6.5 Dimension drawing
ss
Dimensions in mm
Figure 5-14 Dimension drawing of MDS D160
Mobile data storage units
5.7 MDS D165
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 121
5.7 MDS D165
5.7.1 Features
MDS D165 (special version) Features
Application area The design of the transponder
(self-adhesive label) permits a
variety of designs, guaranteeing
optimum dimensioning for the
widest variety of applications.
From simple identification such
as electronic barcode
replacement/supplementation,
through warehouse and
distribution logistics, right up to
product identification.
Memory 112-byte user memory
Read/write range See Chapter Field data
(Page 33).
ISO standard 15693 with I-Code SLI
technology.
5.7.2 Ordering data
Table 5- 11 Ordering data for MDS D165
Order No.
MDS D165 (special version ISO-CARD) 6GT2600-1AB00-0AX0
Type of delivery
Minimum order quantity: 1250 units (5 rolls with 250 units each)
Mobile data storage units
5.7 MDS D165
MOBY D
122 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.7.3 Technical data
Memory configuration
Serial number (UID)
Configuration memory
AFI/DSFID
Application memory
8 bytes (fixed code)
6 bytes
2 bytes
112 bytes
Storage technology EEPROM
Memory organization 4 bytes, block by block
Protocol according to ISO 15693
Data transmission rate
reading
writing
approx. 3.5 ms/byte
approx. 9.5 ms/byte
Multitag capability Yes
Data retention 10 years
Read cycles
Write cycles, min.
Unlimited
100 000
Recommended distance to metal 25 mm (approx. 30% reduction of the field data)
Power supply Inductive power transmission (without battery)
Typical read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter Field data (Page 33)
Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65
Dimensions
L x W (in mm)
Height
86 x 54
approx. 0.3 mm
Material
Top
Inlay
Antenna
Bottom
PET plastic (label material)
PET plastic (carrier material)
Aluminum
Double-sided transfer adhesive on silicon
paper
Color White
Mounting Single-sided adhesive (self-adhesive label)
Imprinting Yes, (heat transfer method)
Ambient temperature during operation
Storage temperature
-25 °C to +85 °C
+20 °C to +30 °C (the storage period is 2
years, determined by durability of the
adhesive)
Mobile data storage units
5.7 MDS D165
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 123
5.7.4 Dimension drawing
W
Dimensions in mm
Figure 5-15 Dimension drawing of MDS D165
Mobile data storage units
5.8 MDS D200
MOBY D
124 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.8 MDS D200
5.8.1 Features
MDS D200 (special version) Features
Application area From simple identification such as
electronic barcode
replacement/supplementation, through
warehouse and distribution logistics, right
up to product identification.
Memory 256-byte user memory
Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33).
Mounting on metal Recommended distance from metal ≥ 30
mm
ISO standard 15693 with Tag-it HFI technology
5.8.2 Ordering data
Table 5- 12 Ordering data for MDS D200
Order No.
MDS D200 (special version ISO-CARD) 6GT2600-1AD00-0AX0
Mobile data storage units
5.8 MDS D200
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 125
5.8.3 Mounting on metal
Mounting on metal
K
h ≥ 20 mm
① Data memory
② Metal
③ Non-metal
Figure 5-16 Mounting of the MDS D200 on metal with spacer
Mobile data storage units
5.8 MDS D200
MOBY D
126 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Flush-mounting
K
D
D
a ≥ 20 mm
h ≥ 20 mm
① Data memory
② Metal
③ Non-metal
Figure 5-17 Flush-mounting of MDS D200 in metal with spacer
Note
If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results.
Mobile data storage units
5.8 MDS D200
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 127
5.8.4 Technical data
Memory configuration
Serial number
Application memory
8 bytes (fixed code)
256 bytes
Storage technology EEPROM
Memory organization 4 bytes, block by block
Protocol according to ISO 15693
Data retention (at +25 °C) 10 years
MTBF (at +25 °C) 2 x 105 hours
Read cycles
Write cycles, min.
Write cycles, typical
Unlimited
100 000
1 000 000
Read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter Field data (Page 33)
Recommended distance to metal 25 mm (approx. 30% reduction of the field data)
Multitag capability Yes
Power supply Inductive power transmission (without battery)
Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP67
Vibration ISO 10373/ISO 7810
Torsion and bending load ISO 10373/ISO 7816-1
Mechanical design
Color
Material
Dimensions (L x W x H in mm)
Laminated plastic card, printable on both sides
White
PET
85 x 54 x 0.8
Mounting Adhesive, fixing lug
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-20 °C to +60 °C
-20 °C to +60 °C
Weight approx. 5 g
Mobile data storage units
5.8 MDS D200
MOBY D
128 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.8.5 Dimension drawing
5
W
Dimensions in mm
Figure 5-18 Dimension drawing of MDS D200
Mobile data storage units
5.9 MDS D261
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 129
5.9 MDS D261
5.9.1 Features
MDS D261 (special version) Features
Application area The design of the transponder
(self-adhesive label) permits a
variety of designs, guaranteeing
optimum dimensioning for the
widest variety of applications.
From simple identification such
as electronic barcode
replacement/supplementation,
through warehouse and
distribution logistics, right up to
product identification.
Memory 256-byte user memory
Read/write range See Chapter Field data
(Page 33).
ISO standard 15693 with Tag-it HFI technology.
5.9.2 Ordering data
Table 5- 13 Ordering data for MDS D261
Order No.
MDS D261 6GT2600-1AA00-0AX0
Type of delivery
Minimum order quantity: 1250 units (5 rolls with 250 units each)
Mobile data storage units
5.9 MDS D261
MOBY D
130 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.9.3 Technical data
Memory configuration
Serial number
AFI/DSFID
Application memory
8 bytes (fixed code)
2 bytes
256 bytes
Storage technology EEPROM
Memory organization 4 bytes, block by block
Protocol according to ISO 15693
Data transmission rate
reading
writing
approx. 3.5 ms/byte
approx. 9.5 ms/byte
Multitag capability Yes
Data retention 10 years
Read cycles
Write cycles, min.
Unlimited
100 000
Recommended distance to metal 25 mm (approx. 30% reduction of the field data)
Power supply Inductive power transmission (without battery)
Typical read/write distance See Chapter Field data (Page 33)
Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65
Dimensions
L x W (in mm)
Height
55 x 55
approx. 0.3 mm
Material
Top
Inlay
Antenna
Bottom
PET plastic (label material)
PET plastic (carrier material)
Aluminum
Double-sided transfer adhesive on silicon
paper
Color White
Mounting Single-sided adhesive (self-adhesive label)
Imprinting Yes (heat transfer method)
Ambient temperature during operation
Storage temperature
-25 °C to +85 °C
+20 °C to +30 °C (the storage period is 2
years, determined by durability of the
adhesive)
Type of delivery Minimum order quantity 1250 units
(5 rolls with 250 units each)
Mobile data storage units
5.9 MDS D261
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 131
5.9.4 Dimension drawing
W
Dimensions in mm
Figure 5-19 Dimension drawing of MDS D261
Mobile data storage units
5.10 MDS D324
MOBY D
132 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.10 MDS D324
5.10.1 Characteristics
MDS D324 Characteristics
Field of application Production and distribution logistics
and product identification
Memory EEPROM 1024 bytes gross
992 bytes net capacity
Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33).
Mounting on metal Not possible:
Recommended distance from metal
≥ 25 mm
High resistance Can also be used in harsh
environments under extreme
environmental conditions (e.g. with
higher temperature load).
ISO standard ISO 15693
5.10.2 Ordering data
Table 5- 14 Ordering data MDS D324
Order number
MDS D324 6GT2600-3AC00
Mobile data storage units
5.10 MDS D324
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 133
5.10.3 Metal-free area
1RQPHWDO
0HWDO
'DWDPHPRU\
K
h ≥ 25 mm
Figure 5-20 Mounting of the MDS D324 on metal with spacer
D
'DWDPHPRU\ 0HWDO
1RQPHWDO
K
h ≥ 25 mm
a ≥ 25 mm
Figure 5-21 Flush-mounting of MDS D324 in metal with spacer
Note
If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is
possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M3 countersunk head screws). This has no
tangible impact on the range.
Mobile data storage units
5.10 MDS D324
MOBY D
134 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.10.4 Technical specifications
Table 5- 15 Technical data MDS D324
Memory size 1024 bytes
Memory configuration
Serial number
Configuration memory
Manufacturer data
8 bytes (fixed code)
1008 bytes
8 bytes
Storage technology EEPROM
Memory organization 1024 EEPROM/gross
992 net capacity
When using the OPT area, 16 bytes of it must be
subtracted in 4 byte blocks
Protocol according to ISO 15693
Data retention (at +40 °C) 10 years
MTBF (at +40 °C) ≥ 1.5 x 106 hours
Read cycles Unlimited
Write cycles, typical 1 000 000
Write cycles, min. 100 000
Read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter
Distance from metal Min. 25 mm (approx. 30% reduction of the field data)
Multitag capability Yes
Anti-collision speed Approx. 20 transponders/s simultaneously
identifiable
Power supply Inductive power transmission
(without battery)
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP67
Shock resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M3
total shock response spectrum, type II
100 g
Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class
7M3
20 g
Torsion and bending load Not permissible
Enclosure
Dimensions (D x H) in mm
Color
Material
27(±-0,2) x 4(±0.2)
Black
Epoxy casting resin
Fixing Adhesive, M3 screw
Tightening torque at +20 °C ≤ 1 Nm
(at high temperatures, the expansion coefficients of
the materials used must be taken into account)
Mobile data storage units
5.10 MDS D324
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 135
Ambient temperature
Operation
During transportation and storage
-25 °C to +125 °C
-40 °C to +150 °C
Weight, ca. 5 g
5.10.5 Dimension drawing
s
s
Dimensions in mm
Figure 5-22 Dimension drawing of MDS D324
Mobile data storage units
5.11 MDS D424
MOBY D
136 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.11 MDS D424
5.11.1 Characteristics
MDS D424 Characteristics
Field of application Production and distribution logistics as well as in
assembly and production lines
Memory FRAM 2048 bytes gross
2000 bytes net
Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33).
Mounting on metal Not possible:
Recommended distance from metal ≥ 25 mm
High resistance Can also be used in a harsh industrial environment
without problem
Standard Oriented according to ISO standard 15693
5.11.2 Ordering data
Table 5- 16 Ordering data of MDS D424
Order number
MDS D424 6GT2600-4AC00
5.11.3 Mounting on metal
Mounting on metal
0HWDO
'DWDPHPRU\
1RQPHWDO
K
h ≥ 25 mm
Figure 5-23 Mounting of the MDS D424 on metal with spacer
Mobile data storage units
5.11 MDS D424
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 137
Flush-mounting
0HWDO
1RQPHWDO 'DWDPHPRU\
K
D
h ≥ 25 mm
a ≥ 25 mm
Figure 5-24 Flush-mounting of MDS D424 in metal with spacer
Note
If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is
possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M3 countersunk head screws). This has no
tangible impact on the range.
Mobile data storage units
5.11 MDS D424
MOBY D
138 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.11.4 Technical specifications
Table 5- 17 Technical data of MDS D424
Memory size 2048 bytes
Memory configuration
Serial number
Configuration memory
Application memory
8 bytes (fixed code)
40 bytes
2000 bytes
Storage technology FRAM
Memory organization 2048 bytes gross
2000 bytes net
Protocol ISO 15693
Data retention (at +40 °C) 10 years
MTBF (at +40 °C) ≥ 1.5 x 106 hours
Read cycles Unlimited
Write cycles (at +40 °C) > 1010
Read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter Field data (Page 33)
Distance from metal Min. 25 mm (ca. 30% reduction of the field data)
Multitag capability Yes
Power supply Inductive power transmission
(without battery)
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP67
Shock according to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M3
Total shock response spectrum, Type II
100 g 1)
Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class
7M3
20 g 1)
Torsion and bending load Not permissible
Enclosure
Color
Material
Dimensions (D x H) in mm
Black
Epoxy casting resin
27(±0.2) x 4(±0.2)
Fixing M3 screw, adhesive
Tightening torque at +20 °C ≤ 1 Nm
Ambient temperature
During operation
Transport and storage
-25 °C to +85 °C
-40 °C to +100 °C
Weight, approx. 5 g
1) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously.
Mobile data storage units
5.11 MDS D424
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 139
5.11.5 Dimension drawing
s
s
Dimensions in mm
Figure 5-25 Dimension drawing of MDS D424
Mobile data storage units
5.12 MDS D428
MOBY D
140 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.12 MDS D428
5.12.1 Characteristics
MDS D428 Characteristics
Field of application Compact and rugged ISO transponder; suitable for screw
mounting
Use in assembly and production lines in the powertrain
sector
Memory FRAM 2048 bytes gross
2000 bytes net
Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33).
Mounting on metal Yes
High resistance Rugged packaging of the MDS D428; can therefore also be
used under extreme environmental conditions without
problem
Standard Oriented according to ISO-15693
5.12.2 Ordering data
Table 5- 18 Ordering data of MDS D428
Order number
MDS D428 6GT2600-4AK00
Mobile data storage units
5.12 MDS D428
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 141
5.12.3 Application example of MDS D428
0DLQILHOG
0RWRUEORFN
&RQYH\RUGLUHFWLRQ
0'6'
6/*
Figure 5-26 Application example
Table 5- 19 Field data MDS D428 - MOBY D-SLG
SLG D10/D10S
ANT D5
SLG D11/D11S
ANT D5
SLG D12/D12S
Operating distance (Sa) 0…120 0…70 0…40
Limit distance (Sg) 160 100 60
Transmission window
(Lx/Ly)
∅ 300 ∅ 280 100 / 60
Minimum distance from
MDS to MDS
≥ 800 ≥ 800 ≥ 300
All values are in mm
Mobile data storage units
5.12 MDS D428
MOBY D
142 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.12.4 Technical specifications
Table 5- 20 Technical data of MDS D428
Memory size 2048 bytes
Memory configuration
Serial number
Configuration memory
Application memory
8 bytes (fixed code)
40 bytes
2000 bytes
Storage technology FRAM
Memory organization 2048 bytes gross
2000 bytes net
Protocol ISO 15693
Data retention (at +40 °C) 10 years
Bulk detection/multitag capability Yes
Read cycles Unlimited
Write cycles at +40 °C, typical > 1010
Read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter Field data (Page 33)
Distance from metal Can be mounted on metal
Power supply Inductive power transmission
(without battery)
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP68 1)
IPx9K 2)
Shock, tested in accordance with IEC 68-2-27 50 g 3)
Vibration, tested in accordance with IEC 68-2-6 20 g 3)
Torsion and bending load Not permissible
Enclosure
Color
Material
Dimensions (D x H) in mm
Black
Plastic PA 6.6 GF;
thread: Stainless steel
18(±1) x 20(±1) (without thread), thread M8
MDS fixing Screws, tightening torque (at room temperature) ≤
1 Nm
Ambient temperature
During operation
Transport and storage
-25 °C to +85 °C
-40 °C to +125 °C
Weight, approx. 35 g
1) 2 hours, 2 m, +20 °C
2) steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 °C
3) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously.
Note
It is recommended that a test is performed in critical applications.
Mobile data storage units
5.12 MDS D428
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 143
5.12.5 Dimension drawing
SIEMENS
*7$.
02%<'
0'6'
0
r
ෘs
s
s
5
ෘ
Dimensions in mm
Figure 5-27 Dimension drawing of MDS D428
Mobile data storage units
5.13 MDS D460
MOBY D
144 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.13 MDS D460
5.13.1 Characteristics
MDS D460 Characteristics
Field of application Identification in small assembly lines
Memory FRAM 2048 bytes gross
2000 bytes net
Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33).
Mounting on metal Not possible:
Recommended distance from metal ≥ 25 mm
High resistance Can also be used in a harsh industrial environment
Standard Oriented according to ISO standard 15693
5.13.2 Ordering data
Table 5- 21 Ordering data of MDS D460
Order number
MDS D460 6GT2600-4AB00
Mobile data storage units
5.13 MDS D460
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 145
5.13.3 Mounting on metal
Mounting on metal
1RQPHWDO
0HWDO
'DWDPHPRU\
K
h ≥ 25 mm
Figure 5-28 Mounting of the MDS D460 on metal with spacer
Note
If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results.
In critical applications, it is recommended that a test is performed.
Flush-mounting
Flush-mounting of the MDS D460 in metal is not permitted!
Mobile data storage units
5.13 MDS D460
MOBY D
146 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
5.13.4 Technical specifications
Memory size 2048 bytes
Memory configuration
Serial number
Configuration memory
Application memory
8 bytes (fixed code)
40 bytes
2000 bytes
Storage technology FRAM
Memory organization 2048 bytes gross
2000 bytes net
Protocol ISO 15693
Data retention (at +40 °C) 10 years
MTBF (at +40 °C) 2 x 106 hours
Bulk detection/multitag capability Yes
Read cycles Unlimited
Write cycles (at +40 °C, typical) > 1010
Read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter Field data (Page 33)
Distance from metal Min. 15 mm (ca. 20% reduction of the field data)
Power supply Inductive power transmission
(without battery)
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP67
IPx9K 1)
Shock, tested in accordance with IEC 68-2-27 50 g 2)
Vibration, tested in accordance with IEC 68-2-6 20 g 2)
Torsion and bending load Not permissible
Enclosure
Color
Material
Dimensions (D x H) in mm
Black
Epoxy casting resin
16(±0.2) x 3,0(±0.2)
MDS fixing Adhesion, spacer
Ambient temperature
During operation
Transport and storage
-25 °C to +85 °C permanent
-40 °C to +100 °C
Weight, approx. 3 g
1) steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 °C
2) The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously.
Mobile data storage units
5.13 MDS D460
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 147
5.13.5 Dimension drawing
ss
Dimensions in mm
Figure 5-29 Dimension drawing of MDS D460
Mobile data storage units
5.13 MDS D460
MOBY D
148 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 149
Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6
6.1 Overview of SLG with RS 232 serial interface
6\VWHPLQWHUQDO56LQWHUIDFH
3&LQWHUIDFH
56
0':$3,
6/*' 6/*'6/*'
$17' $17' $17'
$17'
Figure 6-1 Write/read devices with RS232 interface
Application area
The SLG with the serial RS 232 interface provides the communications interface between
almost any higher-level computer systems, PCs and the mobile data storage unit (MDS).
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.1 Overview of SLG with RS 232 serial interface
MOBY D
150 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
The following variants are available in accordance with customer requirements:
● SLG D10 with
– ANT D5
– ANT D6
– ANT D10
● SLG D11 with
– ANT D2
– ANT D5
● SLG D12 with integral antenna
The rugged housing and high degree of protection (IP65) permit use even under the
toughest industrial conditions.
Design and function
The SLG is connected over a serial interface (RS 232) of the PC that supports
communication with PCs or non-Siemens PLCs. Commands and the data to be written or
read must be converted through an appropriate modulator/demodulator circuit.
The transmittable quantity of information between SLG and MDS depends on:
● The speed at which the MDS moves through the transmission window (determined by the
antenna) of the SLG
● The length of the transmission window
Use of the C++ library supports rapid programming of the SLG using applications executing
under Windows 9x/2000, NT 4.0 and XP.
Table 6- 1 Overview of SLG with RS 232 serial interface
SLG with ANT Operating
distance Sa
(depending on
MDS)
Limit distance
Sg
(depending on
MDS)
Temperature
range
(during
operation)
SLG dimensions
(L x W x H)
in mm
Antenna
dimensions
(L x W x H)
in mm
Degree
of
protectio
n
ANT D5 0 to 400 mm 480 mm -20 to +55 °C 320 x 145 x 100 340 x 325 x 38 IP65
ANT D6 0 to 550 mm 650 mm -20 to +55 °C 320 x 145 x 100 580 x 480 x 110 IP65
SLG D10
ANT D10 0 to 400 mm 480 mm -20 to +55 °C 320 x 145 x 100 1150 x 365 x 115 IP65
ANT D2 35 to 70 mm 90 mm -20 to +70 °C 160 x 80 x 40 75 x 75 x 40 IP65 SLG D11
ANT D5 0 to 300 mm 380 mm -20 to +55 °C 160 x 80 x 40 340 x 325 x 38 IP65
SLG D12 0 to 120 mm 160 mm -20 to +55 °C 160 x 80 x 40 - IP65
Definition of IP65:
● Protection against the ingress of dust (dustproof)
● Complete touch protection
● Protection against water jets
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.1 Overview of SLG with RS 232 serial interface
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 151
Configuration SLG - MDS (over RS 232)
9
LQ
9
LQ
6/*'$17'
*7$$
6/*'
*7$% 9FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
*7++
/DEHO7UDQVSRQGHU
HJ0'6'
*7$$
0'6'
*7$'
$17'DQWHQQD
*76
6SDFHUNLW
*7$%
DFFHVVRU\
:LGHUDQJHSRZHU
VXSSO\XQLW
IRU6,0$7,&5)V\VWHPV
56FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
*7%+
*7%1
*7$$
&'5),'6\VWHPV
6RIWZDUH'RFXPHQWDWLRQ
&OLEUDU\0':$3,
WKHOLEUDU\DOORZV
VHYHUDOVHULDO
LQWHUIDFHVWREHXVHG
VLPXOWDQHRXVO\
3&
Figure 6-2 Configuration SLG - MDS over RS 232
Programming of SLG D10, SLG D11 and SLG D12
Communication is performed on the serial interface between the SLG and the higher-level
computer system (host) by means of an asynchronous 8 bit binary protocol. The message
frames are protected by means of a CRC 16.
Executable on PCs equipped with Pentium 2 processor and higher with a serial interface and
a Windows 9x/2000/NT 4.0/XP operating system.
The SLG is connected to a serial interface of the computer. Users work with the PC
interfaces COM 1 and/or COM 2; further interfaces can be operated with additional
hardware.
For programming, a 32 bit library (MDWAPI for Windows 9x / 2000, NT 4.0l and XP) and
programming guide are available to the user on the CD
RFID Systems Software &
Documentation
.
For computers that are not used under Windows (e.g. UNIX), the communication procedure
is described in the programming guide (MDWAPI).
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.1 Overview of SLG with RS 232 serial interface
MOBY D
152 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Default parameters
The configuration parameters are described in the programming guide (MDWAPI).
Table 6- 2 Ordering data for CD RFID Systems Software & Documentation
Product Order No.
CD
RFID Systems Software & Documentation
6GT2080-2AA10
Note
About MOBY software and licensing
When purchasing an interface module or SLG, neither software nor documentation is
supplied. The CD
RFID Systems Software & Documentation
contains all available FBs/FCs
for SIMATIC, C libraries for Windows Professional, demo programs, etc. and needs to be
ordered separately.
In addition, the CD-ROM contains the complete MOBY documentation (German, English and
some French) in PDF format. The purchase of an interface module or SLG includes a
payment for the use of the software, including documentation, on the CD
RFID Systems
Software & Documentation
and the purchaser acquires the right to make copies (copy
license) insofar as they are required as part of the customer-specific application or
development for the plant.
The enclosed contract pertaining to the use of software products against a one-off payment
shall apply in addition.
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.2 SLG D10 basic unit
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 153
6.2 SLG D10 basic unit
6.2.1 Features
SLG D10 Features
Performance range The SLG D10 is a basic unit in the high-
end range with a serial interface.
Interface RS232 serial interface
Range up to 650 mm (depends on antenna)
Communication with a PC or third-party controllers
Connectable antennas ANT D5
ANT D6
ANT D10
(2 to 4 antennas can be connected via
an antenna duplexer)
Programming options via C library,
Windows 9x, 2000, NT or XP required
Degree of protection IP65
Multitag capability Yes
6.2.2 Ordering data
Table 6- 3 Ordering data for SLG D10
SLG D10 Order No.
SLG D10 basic unit without antenna; with RS 232 serial interface for
standard PC
6GT2698-1AA00
Table 6- 4 Ordering data for SLG D10 accessories
SLG D10 accessories Order No.
24 V connecting cable Length 5 m 6GT2491-1HH50
Length 5 m 6GT2691-0BH50 RS232 cable
Length 20 m 6GT2691-0BN20
EU 6GT2898-0AA00
UK 6GT2898-0AA10
Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF
systems
(100...240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A)
with 2 m plug-in cable with country-specific
connector.
For further information, see Chapter Wide-range
power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
(Page 267)
US 6GT2698-0AA20
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.2 SLG D10 basic unit
MOBY D
154 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
6.2.3 Technical data
Table 6- 5 Technical data for SLG D10 basic unit
Inductive interface to the MDS
Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz
Transponders supported Transponders according to ISO 15693 and
I-Code1
Serial interface to the user RS 232 (RS 422 on request)
Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit
Data transmission rate 9600 baud to 115.2 Kbaud
(adjustable)
Data backup CRC 16
Transmit power up to 10 W
Write/read distances SLG - MDS 650 mm typically (see field data)
Software functions Read, write, initialize MDS, access rights,
multitag
Programming Windows 9x, 2000, NT, XP with 32 bit DLL
available
Multitag Yes
Anti-collision speed approx. 20 labels/s simultaneously
identifiable
Power supply
Current consumption
Operation
Inrush current, momentary
up to 1.4 A
2.8 A/50 ms
Cable lengths
With RS 232
30 m (depending on baud rate)
Digital inputs/outputs None
Enclosure dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 320 x 145 x 100 (without connector)
Color Anthracite
Material Aluminum
Connector
Antenna
V24 interface
Power supply
TNC connector
9-pin Sub-D connector (male)
4-pin M12 connector (male)
Mounting 4 x M6 screws
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-20 °C to +55 °C
-25 °C to +70 °C
MTBF 7.5 x 10 4 hours
Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 (UL: for indoor use only)
Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2
Total shock response spectrum Type II
30 g
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.2 SLG D10 basic unit
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 155
Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Weight, approx. 3500 g
Approvals CE
FCC
IC
UL 60950
Harmless to heart pacemakers
6.2.4 FCC information
Siemens MOBY D SLG D10
FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD10
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized
changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.2 SLG D10 basic unit
MOBY D
156 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
6.2.5 Dimension drawing
$
9LHZ$
1RWH
7KH6/*PXVWEHJURXQGHGRQJURXQGLQJVFUHZ
9LQWHUIDFH
$QWHQQD
3RZHU6XSSO\
Dimensions in mm
Figure 6-3 Dimension drawing of SLG D10 basic unit
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.3 SLG D11 basic unit
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 157
6.3 SLG D11 basic unit
6.3.1 Features
SLG D11 Features
Performance range The SLG D11 is a basic unit in the
medium performance range with a serial
interface.
Interface RS232 serial interface
Communication with a PC or third-party controllers
Connectable
antennas
ANT D2
ANT D5
Programming options via a C library,
Windows 9x, 2000, NT or XP required
Degree of protection IP65
Multitag capability Yes
6.3.2 Ordering data
Table 6- 6 SLG D11 ordering data
SLG D11 Order No.
SLG D11 without antenna; with RS232 serial interface for
standard PC
6GT2698-1AC00
Table 6- 7 SLG D11 accessories ordering data
SLG D11 accessories Order No.
EU 6GT2898-0AA00
UK 6GT2898-0AA10
Wide-range power supply unit for
SIMATIC RF systems (100 - 240 V AC /
24 V DC / 3 A) with 2 m connecting cable
and country-specific plug. US 6GT2698-0AA20
24 V connecting cable, Length 5 m 6GT2491-1HH50
Length 5 m 6GT2691-0BH50 RS232 cable
Length 20 m 6GT2691-0BN20
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.3 SLG D11 basic unit
MOBY D
158 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
6.3.3 Technical specifications
Table 6- 8 Technical data of SLG D11
Inductive interface to the MDS
Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz
Transponders supported Transponders to ISO 15693 and I-Code1
Serial interface to the user RS 232
Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit
Data transmission rate 9600 baud to 38.4 Kbaud (adjustable)
Data backup CRC 16
Transmit power 1 W
Write/read distances
SLG - MDS
See
Software functions Read, write, initialize MDS, access rights
Programming Windows 9x, 2000, NT and XP,
with 32 bit DLL available
Multitag Yes
Anti-collision speed approx. 20 labels/s simultaneously identifiable
Power supply
Rated value
Permitted range
'&9
'&9s8/RQO
\
'&99
Current consumption
Operation
Inrush current, momentary
200 mA
600 mA
Cable length, SLG - PC
With RS 232
Max. 30 m
Digital inputs/outputs None
Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 160 x 80 x 40 without connector
Color Anthracite
Material Plastic PA 12
Connectors
Antenna (plugs into SLG)
V24 interface
Power supply
TNC connector
9-pin Sub-D connector (male)
4-pin M12 connector (male)
SLG fixing 2 x M5 screws
Tightening torque
(at room temperature)
≤ 2 Nm
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-25 °C to +55 °C
-25 °C to +70 °C
MTBF 2.0 x 10 5 hours
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP65 (UL: for indoor only)
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.3 SLG D11 basic unit
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 159
Shock resistant to EN 60721-3-7
Class 7M2 Total shock response
spectrum Type II
30 g
Vibration resistance in accordance with
EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Weight, approx. 600 g
Approvals CE
FCC
IC
Harmless to heart pacemakers
UL 60950
6.3.4 FCC information
Siemens MOBY D SLG D11
FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD11
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized
changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.3 SLG D11 basic unit
MOBY D
160 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
6.3.5 Dimension drawing
ෘ
Dimensions in mm
Figure 6-4 Dimension drawing of the SLG D11
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.4 SLG D12
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 161
6.4 SLG D12
6.4.1 Features
SLG D12 Features
Performance range The SLG D12 is a write/read device in
the lower performance range with serial
interface.
Range up to 160 mm
Interface RS232 serial interface
Communication with a PC or third-party controllers
Antenna integrated
Programming options via a C library,
Windows 9x, 2000, NT or XP required
Degree of protection IP65
Multitag capability Yes
6.4.2 Ordering data
Table 6- 9 Ordering data for SLG D12
SLG D12 Order No.
SLG D12 with integral antenna;
with RS 232 serial interface for standard PC,
6GT2601-0AB00
Table 6- 10 Ordering data for SLG D12 accessories
SLG D12 accessories Order No.
EU 6GT2898-0AA00
UK 6GT2898-0AA10
Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
(100...240 V AC/24 V DC/3 A)
with 2 m plug-in cable with country-specific connector. For
further information, see Section Wide-range power supply
unit for SIMATIC RF systems (Page 267).
US 6GT2698-0AA20
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.4 SLG D12
MOBY D
162 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
6.4.3 Technical data
Table 6- 11 Technical data for SLG D12
Inductive interface to the MDS
Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz
Transponders supported Transponders according to ISO 15693 and I-Code1
Serial interface to the user RS 232
Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit
Data transmission rate 9600 baud to 38.4 Kbaud (adjustable)
Data backup CRC 16
Transmit power 1 W
Write/read distances SLG - MDS 160 mm typically (see field data)
Software functions Read, write, initialize MDS, access rights, multitag
Programming Windows 9x, 2000, NT and XP with 32 bit DLL available
Multitag Yes
Anti-collision speed approx. 20 labels/s simultaneously identifiable
Power supply
Rated value
Permissible range
'&9
'&9s8/RQO\
'&99
Current consumption
Operation
Inrush current, momentary
150 mA
600 mA
Cable length SLG – PC with RS 232 30 m
Digital inputs/outputs None
Enclosure dimensions (L x W x H) in
mm
160 x 80 x 40 (without connector)
Color Anthracite
Material Plastic PA 12
Connector
V24 interface
Power supply
9-pin Sub-D connector (male)
4-pin M12 connector (male)
Mounting 2 x M5 screws
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-25 °C to +55 °C
-25 °C to +70 °C
MTBF 2.0 x 10 5 hours
Degree of protection according to EN
60529
IP65 (UL: for indoor use only)
Shock resistant according to EN
60721-3-7 Class 7M2
Total shock response spectrum Type II
30 g
Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7
Class 7M2
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.4 SLG D12
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 163
Weight, approx. 500 g
Approvals CE
FCC
IC
Harmless to heart pacemakers
UL 60950
Note
The SLG D12 can process up to 4 MDS with I-Code 1-Chip (e.g. MDS D139) in multitag
mode!
6.4.4 FCC information
Siemens MOBY D SLG D12
FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD12
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized
changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.4 SLG D12
MOBY D
164 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
6.4.5 Transmission window
6/*'
0
6
D
6
J
/
\
/
[
6WDQGDUG
FRQILJXUDWLRQ
/RQJLWXGLQDO[D[LV/
[
3ODQYLHZ
7UDQVSRQGHU
7UDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZ
6LGHYLHZ
Lx 120 mm
Ly 60 mm
Figure 6-5 Transmission window for SLG D12
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.4 SLG D12
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 165
6.4.6 Secondary fields
0'6
0'6
0'6
0'6
6/*
$X[LOLDU\ILHOG 0DLQILHOG
6/*
$X[LOLDU\ILHOG 0DLQILHOG
0HWDO
&RUUHFW ,QFRUUHFW&RQYH\LQJXQLW
&RQYH\LQJXQLW
Figure 6-6 MDS shielding
To avoid undesired reading of the MDS outside the main field, the MDS must be shielded.
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.4 SLG D12
MOBY D
166 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
6.4.7 Influence of metal
0HWDO 6/*
6/*
$X[LOLDU\ILHOG 0DLQILHOG
0DLQILHOGUHGXFHG
Figure 6-7 Reduction in range through influence of metal
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.4 SLG D12
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 167
6.4.8 Metal-free area
0HWDO
K +HLJKWRIWKH6/* PP
0HWDO
DE 0HWDOIUHHGLVWDQFHV PP
K
EE
D
D
Figure 6-8 Metal-free area for SLG D12
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.4 SLG D12
MOBY D
168 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
6.4.9 Minimum distances between several SLGs
Definition of distance D
'
'
D ≥ 0.5 m
Figure 6-9 Distance D: SLG D12
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.4 SLG D12
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 169
6.4.10 Dimension drawing
;
<
$
ෘ
9LHZ$
9LQWHUIDFH
3RZHU6XSSO\
Dimensions in mm
Figure 6-10 Dimension drawing of SLG D12
Write/read devices with RS232 interface
6.4 SLG D12
MOBY D
170 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 171
Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7
7.1 Overview SLG with RS 422 for SIMATIC S7 and PROFIBUS DP-V1
6\VWHPLQWHUQDO56LQWHUIDFH
$60
I¾U
6,0$7,&6
5)&
I¾U
(7SUR
$60
I¾U
(7;
$60I¾U
352),%86
'39
$60I¾U
352),%86
'3'39
5)&
5)&
I¾U352),1(7,2
6/*'6 6/*'66/*'6
$17' $17' $17'
$17'
Figure 7-1 Write/read devices with RS422 interface
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.1 Overview SLG with RS 422 for SIMATIC S7 and PROFIBUS DP-V1
MOBY D
172 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Application area
The SLG D1xS provides inductive communication with the mobile data storage units (MDS)
and serial coupling to the interface modules (ASM).
A range of different SLGs are available for small, medium and large distances to the MDS
meeting all customer requirements.
● SLG D10S with
– ANT D5
– ANT D6
– ANT D10
● SLG D11S with
– ANT D2
– ANT D5
● SLG D12S with integral antenna
● SLG D12S with integral antenna (plug-in version)
The rugged housing and high degree of protection (IP65) permit use even under the
toughest industrial conditions.
Design and function
The SLG implements the commands received from the interface module. These commands
and the data to be written or read are processed by a corresponding modulator/demodulator
circuit.
Communication between the MDS and SLG is performed over an inductive alternating field.
The transmittable quantity of information between SLG and MDS depends on:
● The speed at which the MDS moves through the transmission window of the SLG
antenna
● The length of the transmission window
● The MDS type
Table 7- 1 Overview of SLG with RS 422 interface
SLG with ANT Operating
distance Sa
(depending on
MDS)
Limit distance
Sg
(depending on
MDS)
Temperature
range
(during
operation)
SLG dimensions
(L x W x H)
in mm
Antenna
dimensions
(L x W x H)
in mm
Degree
of
protecti
on
ANT D5 0 to 400 mm 480 mm -20 to +55 °C 320 x 145 x 100 340 x 325 x 38 IP65
ANT D6 0 to 550 mm 650 mm -20 to +55 °C 320 x 145 x 100 580 x 480 x 110 IP65
SLG D10S
ANT D10 0 to 400 mm 480 mm -20 to +55 °C 320 x 145 x 100 1150 x 365 x 115 IP65
ANT D2 35 to 70 mm 90 mm -20 to +70 °C 160 x 80 x 40 75 x 75 x 40 IP65 SLG D11S
ANT D5 0 to 300 mm 380 mm -20 to +55 °C 160 x 80 x 40 340 x 325 x 38 IP65
SLG D12S 1) 0 to 120 mm 160 mm -20 to +55 °C 160 x 80 x 40 - IP65
SLG D12S
(plug-in version) 1)
0 to 120 mm 160 mm -25 to +55 °C 160 x 80 x 40 - IP67
1) Integral antenna
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.1 Overview SLG with RS 422 for SIMATIC S7 and PROFIBUS DP-V1
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 173
Definition of IP65:
● Protection against the ingress of dust (dustproof)
● Complete touch protection
● Protection against water jets
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.2 SLG D10S basic unit
MOBY D
174 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
7.2 SLG D10S basic unit
7.2.1 Features
SLG D10S Features
Performance range The SLG D10S is a basic unit in the
high-end range with a serial interface.
Interface Serial interface RS 422
Communication via interface modules to SIMATIC S7 or
PROFIBUS DP-V1/PROFINET/Ethernet
IP
Range up to 650 mm (depends on antenna)
Connectable antennas ANT D5
ANT D6
ANT D10
(2 to 4 antennas can be connected via
an antenna duplexer)
Connectable ASM ASM 452
ASM 456
ASM 473
ASM 475
RF170C
RF180C
RF182C
Degree of protection IP65
Multitag capability Yes
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.2 SLG D10S basic unit
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 175
7.2.2 Ordering data
Table 7- 2 Ordering data for SLG D10S basic unit
SLG D10S Order No.
SLG D10S basic device without antenna;
with serial interface RS422 for connection to ASM 4xx
6GT2698-2AA00
Table 7- 3 Ordering data for SLG D10S basic unit accessories
SLG D10S accessories Order No.
24 V connecting cable Length 5 m 6GT2491-1HH50
EU 6GT2898-0AA00
UK 6GT2898-0AA10
Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF
systems (100...240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A)
with 2 m plug-in cable with country-specific
connector.
For further information, see Chapter Wide-range
power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
(Page 267)
US 6GT2698-0AA20
ASM - SLG D10S plug-in cables
ASM 456
RF170C
RF180C
RF182C
Length 2 m 6GT2691-0FH20
ASM plug-in cables
Length 2 m 6GT2891-0EH20 ASM 475
Length 5 m 6GT2891-0EH50
Length 2 m 6GT2891-1CH20 ASM 473
ASM 452 Length 5 m 6GT2891-1CH50
Extension cables
Length 2 m 6GT2891-0FH20
Length 5 m 6GT2891-0FH50
Length 10 m 6GT2891-0FN10
Length 20 m 6GT2891-0FN20
ASM 456
Length 50 m 6GT2891-0FN50
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.2 SLG D10S basic unit
MOBY D
176 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
7.2.3 Technical data
Table 7- 4 Technical data for SLG D10S basic unit
Inductive interface to the MDS
Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz
Transponders supported Transponders according to ISO 15693 and I-
Code1
Serial interface to the user RS 422
Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit
Data transmission rate 19.2 Kbaud to 115.2 Kbaud
(depending on ASM)
Data backup CRC 16
Transmit power up to 10 W
Write/read distances for SLG 650 mm typically (see field data)
Software functions Read, write, initialize MDS
The Repeat command is not permissible.
A buffer of up to 256 bytes is available in the SLG
for concatenating commands For one command,
therefore, it is only possible to combine
commands until the sum of the header and user
data of the individual message frames does not
exceed this value. FC 45 limits the user data
length for each individual message frame to 233
bytes.
Programming FC 45
Transmission protocol 3964R
Multitag Available soon
Power supply
'&9s
Current consumption
Operation
Inrush current, momentary
up to 1.4 A
2.8 A/50 ms
Cable length for SLG S7
With RS 422
300 m
Digital inputs/outputs None
Enclosure dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 320 x 145 x 100 (without connector)
Color Anthracite
Material Aluminum
Connector
Antenna (plugs into SLG)
RS 422 interface
Power supply
TNC connector
9-pin Sub-D connector (male)
4-pin M12 connector (male)
SLG fixing 4 x M6 screws
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.2 SLG D10S basic unit
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 177
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-20 °C to +55 °C
-25 °C to +70 °C
MTBF 7.5 x 10 4 hours
Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 (UL: for indoor use only)
Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7
Class 7M2
Total shock response spectrum Type II
30 g
Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Weight, approx. 3500 g
Approvals CE
FCC
IC
Harmless to heart pacemakers
UL 60950
7.2.4 FCC information
Siemens MOBY D SLG D10S
FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD10
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized
changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.2 SLG D10S basic unit
MOBY D
178 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
7.2.5 Dimension drawing
$
9LHZ$
1RWH
7KH6/*PXVWEHJURXQGHGRQJURXQGLQJVFUHZ
56LQWHUIDFH
$QWHQQD
3RZHU6XSSO\
Dimensions in mm
Figure 7-2 Dimension drawing of SLG D10S basic unit
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.3 SLG D11S basic unit
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 179
7.3 SLG D11S basic unit
7.3.1 Features
SLG D11 Features
Performance range The SLG D11S is a basic unit in the
medium performance range with a
serial interface.
Interface RS422 serial interface
Communication via interface modules to SIMATIC S7
or PROFIBUS DP-
V1/PROFINET/Ethernet IP
Connectable ASM ASM 452
ASM 456
ASM 473
ASM 475
RF170C
RF180C
RF182C
Programming options e.g. via FC 45
Degree of protection IP65
Multitag capability no
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.3 SLG D11S basic unit
MOBY D
180 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
7.3.2 Ordering data
Table 7- 5 Ordering data for SLG D11S basic unit
SLG D11S Order No.
SLG D11S basic device without antenna; with serial interface RS422 for
connection to ASM.
6GT2698-2AC00
Table 7- 6 Ordering data for SLG D11S basic unit accessories
SLG D11S accessories Order No.
24 V connecting cable Length 5 m 6GT2491-1HH50
EU 6GT2898-0AA00
UK 6GT2898-0AA10
Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF
systems (100...240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A) with 2 m
plug-in cable and country-specific connector US 6GT2898-0AA20
ASM - SLG D11S connecting cables
ASM 456
RF170C
RF180C
RF182C
Length 2 m 6GT2691-0FH20
ASM plug-in cables
Length 2 m 6GT2891-0EH20 ASM 475
Length 5 m 6GT2891-0EH50
Length 2 m 6GT2891-1CH20 ASM 473
ASM 452 Length 5 m 6GT2891-1CH50
Extension cables
Length 2 m 6GT2891-0FH20
Length 5 m 6GT2891-0FH50
Length 10 m 6GT2891-0FN10
Length 20 m 6GT2891-0FN20
ASM 456
Length 50 m 6GT2891-0FN50
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.3 SLG D11S basic unit
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 181
7.3.3 Technical specifications
Table 7- 7 Technical data for SLG D11S
Inductive interface to the MDS
Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz
Transponders supported Transponders to ISO 15693 and I-Code1
Serial interface to the user RS 422
Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit
Data transmission rate 19.2 Kbaud
Data backup CRC 16
Transmit power 1 W (reset parameter 04 hex)
Write/read distances SLG - MDS See
Software functions Read, write and initialize MDS
Concatenated commands are not permitted.
The Repeat command is not implemented.
The largest possible useful data length in a command is 233
bytes.
Programming FC 45
Transmission protocol 3964R
Multitag no
Power supply
Operation
Permitted range
'&9
'&9s8/RQO\
'&99
Current consumption
Operation
Inrush current, momentary
200 mA
600 mA
Cable length SLG – SIMATIC S7
With RS 422
300 m
Digital inputs/outputs None
Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 160 x 80 x 40 without connector
Color Anthracite
Material Plastic PA 12
Connectors
Antenna (plugs into SLG)
RS-422 interface
Power Supply
TNC connector
9-pin Sub-D connector (male)
4-pin M12 connector (male)
SLG fixing 2 x M5 screws
Tightening torque
(at room temperature)
≤ 2 Nm
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-25 °C to +55 °C
-25 °C to +70 °C
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.3 SLG D11S basic unit
MOBY D
182 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
MTBF 2.0 x 10 5 hours
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP65 (UL: For indoor use only)
Shock resistant to EN 60721-3-7,
Class 7M2
Total shock response spectrum,
Type II
30 g
Vibration resistance in accordance
with EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Weight, approx. 600 g
Approvals CE
FCC
IC
Harmless to heart pacemakers
UL 60950
7.3.4 FCC information
Siemens MOBY D SLG D11S
FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD11
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized
changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.3 SLG D11S basic unit
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 183
7.3.5 Dimension drawing
)HUULW
PD[
PP
0LQLPXPEHQGLQJ
UDGLXVPP
56&
3RZHUVXSSO\
ෘ
Dimensions in mm
Figure 7-3 Dimension drawing of SLG D11S
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.4 SLG D12S
MOBY D
184 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
7.4 SLG D12S
7.4.1 Features
SLG D12S Features
Performance range The SLG D12S is a write/read device in
the lower performance range with serial
interface.
Range up to 160 mm
Interface RS232 serial interface
Communication via interface modules to SIMATIC S7 or
PROFIBUS DP-V1/PROFINET/Ethernet
IP
Connectable ASM ASM 452
ASM 456
ASM 473
ASM 475
RF170C
RF180C
RF182C
Antenna integrated
Programming options e.g. via FC 45
Degree of protection IP65
Multitag capability no
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.4 SLG D12S
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 185
7.4.2 Ordering data
Table 7- 8 Ordering data for SLG D12S
SLG D12S Order No.
SLG D12S with integrated antenna;
with serial interface RS422 for connection to ASM
6GT2602-0AB00
Table 7- 9 Ordering data for SLG D12S accessories
SLG D12S accessories Order No.
24 V connecting cable Length 5 m 6GT2491-1HH50
EU 6GT2898-0AA00
UK 6GT2898-0AA10
Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF
systems (100...240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A) with 2 m
plug-in cable with country-specific connector.
For further information, see Chapter Wide-range
power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
(Page 267)
US 6GT2698-0AA20
ASM - SLG D12S plug-in cables
ASM 456
RF170C
RF180C
RF182C
Length 2 m 6GT2691-0FH20
ASM plug-in cables
Length 2 m 6GT2891-0EH20 ASM 475
Length 5 m 6GT2891-0EH50
Length 2 m 6GT2891-1CH20 ASM 473
ASM 452 Length 5 m 6GT2891-1CH50
Extension cables
Length 2 m 6GT2891-0FH20
Length 5 m 6GT2891-0FH50
Length 10 m 6GT2891-0FN10
Length 20 m 6GT2891-0FN20
ASM 456
Length 50 m 6GT2891-0FN50
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.4 SLG D12S
MOBY D
186 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
7.4.3 Technical data
Table 7- 10 Technical data for SLG D12S
Inductive interface to the MDS
Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz
Transponders supported Transponders according to ISO 15693 and I-Code1
Serial interface to the user RS 422
Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit
Data transmission rate 19.2 Kbaud
Data backup CRC 16
Transmit power 1 W (reset parameter 04 hex)
Write/read distances SLG - MDS 160 mm typically (see field data)
Software functions Read, write and initialize MDS
Concatenated commands are not permitted.
The Repeat command is not implemented.
The largest possible useful data length in a command is
233 bytes.
Programming FC 45
Transmission protocol 3964R
Multitag no
Power supply
Operation
Permissible range
'&9
'&9s8/RQO\
'&99
Current consumption
Operation
Inrush current, momentary
150 mA
600 mA
Cable length SLG – SIMATIC S7
With RS 422
300 m
Digital inputs/outputs None
Enclosure dimensions (L x W x H) in
mm
160 x 80 x 40 (without connector)
Color Anthracite
Material Plastic PA 12
Connector
RS 422 interface
Power supply
9-pin Sub-D connector (male)
4-pin M12 connector (male)
Mounting 2 x M5 screws
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-25 °C to +55 °C
-25 °C to +70 °C
MTBF 2.0 x 10 5 hours
Degree of protection according to EN
60529
IP65 (UL: for indoor use only)
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.4 SLG D12S
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 187
Shock resistant according to EN
60721-3-7 Class 7M2
Total shock response spectrum Type II
30 g
Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7
Class 7M2
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Weight, approx. 600 g
Approvals CE
FCC
IC
Harmless to heart pacemakers
UL 60950
7.4.4 FCC information
Siemens MOBY D SLG D12S
FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD12
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized
changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.4 SLG D12S
MOBY D
188 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
7.4.5 Transmission window
6/*'6
0
6
D
6
J
/
\
/
[
6WDQGDUG
FRQILJXUDWLRQ
/RQJLWXGLQDO[D[LV/
[
3ODQYLHZ
7UDQVSRQGHU
7UDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZ
6LGHYLHZ
Lx 120 mm
Ly 60 mm
Figure 7-4 Transmission window for SLG D12S
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.4 SLG D12S
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 189
7.4.6 Secondary fields
0'6
0'6
0'6
0'6
6/*
$X[LOLDU\ILHOG 0DLQILHOG
6/*
$X[LOLDU\ILHOG 0DLQILHOG
0HWDO
&RUUHFW ,QFRUUHFW&RQYH\LQJXQLW
&RQYH\LQJXQLW
Figure 7-5 MDS shielding
To avoid undesired reading of the MDS outside the main field, the MDS must be shielded.
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.4 SLG D12S
MOBY D
190 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
7.4.7 Influence of metal
0HWDO 6/*
6/*
$X[LOLDU\ILHOG 0DLQILHOG
0DLQILHOGUHGXFHG
Figure 7-6 Reduction in range through influence of metal
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.4 SLG D12S
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 191
7.4.8 Metal-free area
0HWDO
K +HLJKWRIWKH6/* PP
0HWDO
DE 0HWDOIUHHGLVWDQFHV PP
K
EE
D
D
Figure 7-7 Metal-free area for SLG D12S
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.4 SLG D12S
MOBY D
192 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
7.4.9 Minimum distances between several SLGs
Definition of distance D
'
'
D ≥ 0.5 m
Figure 7-8 Distance D: SLG D12S
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.4 SLG D12S
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 193
7.4.10 Dimension drawing
;
<
$
ෘ
9LHZ$
56LQWHUIDFH
3RZHU6XSSO\
Dimensions in mm
Figure 7-9 Dimension drawing of SLG D12S
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version)
MOBY D
194 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version)
7.5.1 Features
SLG D12S (plug-in version) Features
Performance range The SLG D12S (plug-in version) is a
write/read device in the lower
performance range with serial interface.
Range up to 160 mm
Interface RS422 serial interface
8-pin M12 connector for
Power supply
Data communication
Communication via interface modules to SIMATIC S7 or
PROFIBUS DP-V1/PROFINET/Ethernet
IP
Connectable ASM ASM 452
ASM 456
ASM 473
ASM 475
RF170C
RF180C
RF182C
Antenna integrated
Programming options e.g. via FB 45/FC 45
High degree of
protection
IP67
Multitag capability no
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version)
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 195
7.5.2 Ordering data
Table 7- 11 SLG D12S special version ordering data
SLG D12S special version Order No.
Write/read device SLG D12S
With a serial RS 422 interface for connection to ASM 452,
ASM 456, ASM 473, ASM 475, RF170C, RF180C and RF181C,
with an integral antenna
6GT2602-0AB10-0AX0
Table 7- 12 SLG D12S special version accessories ordering data
SLG D12S special version accessories:
Preassembled connection cables Reader - ASM
Order No.
Length: 2 m 6GT2891-0EH20 ASM 475
Length: 5 m 6GT2891-0EH50
Length: 2 m 6GT2891-1CH20 ASM 452
ASM 473 Length: 5 m 6GT2891-1CH50
Length: 2 m 6GT2891-0FH20
Length: 5 m 6GT2891-0FH50
Length: 10 m 6GT2891-0FN10
Length: 20 m 6GT2891-0FN20
ASM 456
RF170C
RF180C
Length: 50 m 6GT2891-0FN50
Note
The connecting cables for ASM 475, ASM 452/473 can be extended accordingly with the
connecting cables 6GT2891-0Fxxx.
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version)
MOBY D
196 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
7.5.3 Technical specifications
Table 7- 13 Technical specifications for SLG D12S special version
Inductive interface to the MDS
Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz
Transponders supported Transponders to ISO 15693 and I-Code1
Serial interface to the user RS 422
Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit
Data transmission rate 19.2 Kbaud
Data backup CRC 16
Transmit power 1 W (reset parameter 04 hex)
Write/read distances SLG - MDS 160 mm typically (see field data)
Software functions Read, write and initialize MDS
Concatenated commands are not permitted.
The Repeat command is not implemented.
The largest possible useful data length in a
command is 233 bytes.
Programming FB/FC 45
Transmission protocol 3964R
Multitag no
Power supply Via ASM
Current consumption
Operation
Inrush current, momentary
150 mA
600 mA
Cable length SLG – SIMATIC S7
With RS 422
300 m
Digital inputs/outputs None
Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 160 x 80 x 40 (without connector)
Color Anthracite
Material Plastic PA 12
Connector
RS-422 interface/power supply
8-pin M12 connector (male)
Mounting 2 x M5 screws
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-25 °C to +55 °C
-25 °C to +70 °C
MTBF 2.0 x 105 hours
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP67
Shock resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2
Total shock response spectrum, Type II
30 g
Vibration compliant with EN 60721-3-7, Class
7M2
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version)
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 197
Weight, approx. 600 g
Approvals CE
Harmless to heart pacemakers
7.5.4 Field data
Table 7- 14 Field data for SLG D12S special version
Limit distance (Sg) max. 160 mm (dependent on transponder)
Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 120 mm (dependent on transponder)
Length of transmission window (Lx/Ly) 120 mm/60 mm
Width of the transmission window (Wx/Wy) 48 mm/24 mm
Minimum distance from SLG D12S to SLG D12S ≥ 0.5 m
See also MOBY D System Manual, Chapter .
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version)
MOBY D
198 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
7.5.5 Transmission window
Side view
① Transmission window
② Transponder
6/*'6
D
J
6
6
6/*
Plan view
① Transmission window
/[
0
/\
Standard configuration longitudinal, X-axis (Lx)
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version)
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 199
7.5.6 Secondary fields
0'6
0'6
0'6
0'6
6/*
6HFRQGDU\ILHOG 0DLQILHOG
6/*
6HFRQGDU\ILHOG 0DLQILHOG
0HWDO
&RUUHFW ,QFRUUHFW&RQYH\LQJXQLW
&RQYH\LQJXQLW
Figure 7-10 MDS shielding
To avoid undesired reading of the MDS outside the main field, the MDS must be shielded.
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version)
MOBY D
200 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
7.5.7 Influence of metal
0HWDO 6/*
6/*
6HFRQGDU\ILHOG 0DLQILHOG
0DLQILHOGUHGXFHG
Figure 7-11 Reduction in range through influence of metal
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version)
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 201
7.5.8 Metal-free area
Mounting the SLG D12S special version on metal
K
① = Metal
h h = Mechanical height of the SLG = 40 mm
Flush-mounting of SLG D12S special version in metal:
EE
D
D
① = Metal
a, b = Metal-free distances = 50 mm
When installing in the vicinity of metal, observe the instructions in the System Manual's
Chapter .
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version)
MOBY D
202 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
7.5.9 Minimum distances between several SLGs
'
'
Distance D ≥ 0.5 m
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version)
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 203
7.5.10 Dimensional diagram
9LHZ$
;
<
$
ෘ
Dimensions in
mm
Figure 7-12 Dimension drawing of SLG D12S special version
Write/read devices with RS422 interface
7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version)
MOBY D
204 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 205
Antennas 8
8.1 ANT D2
8.1.1 Features
ANT D2 Features
Applications Suitable for high speeds, e.g. in
Overhead conveyors
Assembly lines
Production
Order picking
Antenna field Designed for transponders that are directed
sideways past the antenna.
See Chapter Transmission window (Page 207)
Writing/reading distance typ. 60 mm;
Connecting cable 3.3 m (included in scope of supply)
Connectable SLGs SLG D11
SLG D11S
Degree of protection IP65
8.1.2 Ordering data
Table 8- 1 ANT D2 ordering data
Product Order No.
ANT D2
incl. antenna cable (3.3 m)
6GT2698-5BB00
Table 8- 2 Ordering data for ANTD2 accessories
Accessories Order No.
Antenna duplexer
(with 1 antenna connecting cable 3.3 m)
6GT2690-0AC00
Antenna cable, length 10.5 m 6GT2691-0CN10
Antenna extension, length 7.2 m 6GT2691-0DH72
Antennas
8.1 ANT D2
MOBY D
206 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
8.1.3 Technical specifications for ANT D2
Table 8- 3 Technical specifications for ANT D2
Max. write/read distance
ANT to MDS (Sg)
See also Field data for MDS and SLG.
Dimensions in mm (L x W x H) 75 x 75 x 40
Antenna cable length in 3.3 m
Color Anthracite
Material PA 12 (polyamide 12)
Plug connection Single-pole TNC connector
Max. power 4 W
Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7 Class
7M2
Total shock response spectrum Type II
50 g
Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 10 g (5…500 Hz)
Attachment of the antenna 2 x M5 screws
Tightening torque
(at room temperature)
≤ 2 Nm
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-20 °C to +70 °C
-25 °C to +85 °C
MTBF 2 x 107 hours
Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65
Weight, approx. 260 g
Approvals CE
FCC
IC
Harmless to heart pacemakers in combination
with SLG D11/D11S
Antennas
8.1 ANT D2
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 207
8.1.4 Transmission window
Figure 8-1 Transmission window for ANT D2
1 Level 1
2 Level 2
3 Level 3
⇓ Direction of motion of the transponder
Green Main field (processing field)
Blue Secondary fields
Operating range (Sa)
The operating range lies between level 1 and level 3.
The operating range between level 1 and 2 includes secondary fields.
The recommended operating range therefore lies in the green main field between Level 2
and Level 3.
Antennas
8.1 ANT D2
MOBY D
208 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Limit distance (Sg)
The limit distance lies on Level 3
Lateral view Level 1 Lateral view Level 2
/
L: Length of the transmission window
8.1.5 Metal-free area
Direct mounting of the ANT D2 on metal is permitted. No range losses must be expected
here.
Figure 8-2 Metal-free area for ANT D2
Antennas
8.1 ANT D2
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 209
8.1.6 Minimum distance between several ANT D2 antennas
'
'
Figure 8-3 Minimum distance between several ANT D2 antennas
Minimum distance D from ANT D2 to ANT D2 D ≥ 500 mm
8.1.7 Dimension drawing
02%<'
$17'
Figure 8-4 Dimension drawing for ANT D2
Antennas
8.2 ANT D5
MOBY D
210 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
8.2 ANT D5
8.2.1 Features
ANT D5 Features
Applications Storage, logistics and distribution
Writing/reading distance Up to 480 mm (depending on MDS)
Connecting cable 3.3 m; pre-assembled
Connectable SLG SLG D10/10S
SLG D11/11S
Degree of protection IP65
8.2.2 Ordering data
Table 8- 4 Ordering data of ANT D5
ANT D5 Order No.
Dimensions L x W x H in mm: 340 x 325 x 38
Antenna cable 3.3 m; permanently preassembled
6GT2698-5AA00
Table 8- 5 Ordering data of ANT D5 accessories
Accessories Order No.
Spacer kit for ANT D5 made of aluminum with plastic spacers incl.
fixing screws
Individual parts:
1 aluminum plate 380 x 380 x 2
4 plastic bolts 100 x 20
4 countersunk-head screws M5 x 12
4 combination screws M5 x 20
6GT2690-0AB00
Antenna duplexer
(with 1 antenna connecting cable 3.3 m)
6GT2690-0AC00
Antenna cable, length 10.5 m 6GT2691-0CN10
Antenna extension, length 7.2 m 6GT2691-0DH72
Antennas
8.2 ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 211
8.2.3 Technical data
Table 8- 6 Technical specifications for ANT D5
Max. write/read distance
ANT to MDS (Sg)
480 mm 1)
Dimensions in mm (L x W x H) 340 x 325 x 38
Color Black
Material Plastic ASA
Plug connection 1-pin TNC connector
Max. power 10 W (FCC/IC:4 W)
Antenna cable length 3.6 m
Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7
Class 7M2
Total shock response spectrum Type II
30 g
Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class
7M2
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Attachment of the antenna 4 x M5 screws
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-20 °C to +55 °C
-25 °C to +70 °C
MTBF 3 x 10 5 hours
Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 (UL: for indoor use only)
Weight, approx. 1 kg
Approvals CE
FCC
IC
Harmless to heart pacemakers
UL 60950
1) In order to ensure optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at the factory at a distance of
100 mm from metal (see the accessory "Spacer kit" in the ordering data section).
Antennas
8.2 ANT D5
MOBY D
212 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
8.2.4 Transmission window
6LGHYLHZ
7UDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZ
3ODQYLHZ
0HWDOSODWH
)RU6
DPLQ
WKHWUDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZLVH[WHQGHG
6SDFHUNLW
6
DPLQ
6
DPD[
6
D
/
G
$17'
6
J
6
J
PP
Ld = 300 mm
Figure 8-5 Transmission window for ANT D5
Antennas
8.2 ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 213
8.2.5 Metal-free area
Flush-mounted in metal
D
D
D
D
D PP
0HWDO
K PPQRQPHWDOVSDFHU
Figure 8-6 Metal-free area for ANT D5
For further information on spacers, see section Ordering data (Page 210) ANT D5
accessories, spacer kit, as well as Dimension drawings (Page 215).
When installing in the vicinity of metal, observe the instructions in the Section
See also
Planning the MOBY D system (Page 25)
Antennas
8.2 ANT D5
MOBY D
214 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
8.2.6 Minimum distance between antennas
Definition of distance D
'LVWDQFH'ุP
'
'
Figure 8-7 Distance D: ANT D5
Antennas
8.2 ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 215
8.2.7 Dimension drawings
Dimension drawing for ANT D5
ෘ
)HUULWH
&DEOHNLQNSURWHFWLRQ
IOH[LEOHLQHYHU\GLUHFWLRQ 0LQLPXP
EHQGLQJ
UDGLXVPP
&DEOHOHQJWKP
[
PD[
PP
Figure 8-8 Dimension drawing for ANT D5
Antennas
8.2 ANT D5
MOBY D
216 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Dimension drawing and sketch for mounting spacer kit
ෘ ෘ
ෘ
0[
7
5
$
OXPLQLXPSODWH
3ODVWLFEROWV
Figure 8-9 Dimension drawing for ANT D5 spacer kit
Antennas
8.2 ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 217
+ROHVIRU$17'
Figure 8-10 Sketch for mounting spacer kit
Antennas
8.3 ANT D6
MOBY D
218 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
8.3 ANT D6
8.3.1 Features
ANT D6 Features
Applications Storage, logistics and distribution
Suitable for high-speed applications
with large writing/reading distance
Writing/reading distance Up to 650 mm (depending on MDS)
Connecting cable 3.3 m; included in scope of supply
Covering hood Available as accessory
Connectable SLG SLG D10/10S
$17' &RYHULQJKRRG
Degree of protection IP65 (can also be achieved without
covering hood)
8.3.2 Ordering data
Table 8- 7 ANT D6 ordering data
ANT D6 Order No.
Dimensions L x W x H in mm: 580 x 480 x 110 (without cover)
Antenna cable included in scope of supply
6GT2698-5AB00
Table 8- 8 Ordering data for ANT D6 accessories
Accessories Order No.
Covering hood for ANT D6 6GT2690-0AD00
Antenna duplexer
(with 1 antenna connecting cable 3.3 m)
6GT2690-0AC00
Length 3.3 m 6GT2691-0CH33 Antenna cable
Length 10.5 m 6GT2691-0CN10
Antenna extension, length 7.2 m 6GT2691-0DH72
Antennas
8.3 ANT D6
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 219
8.3.3 Technical data
Table 8- 9 Technical specifications for ANT D6
Max. write/read distance
ANT to MDS (Sg)
650 mm
Dimensions in mm (L x W x H) 580 x 480 x 110
(without cover)
Color Gray/black
Material Aluminum/plastic
Plug connection 1-pin TNC connector
Max. power 10 W (FCC/IC: 2.5 W)
Antenna cable length 3.3 m
Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7
Class 7M2
Total shock response spectrum Type II
30 g
Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class
7M2
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Attachment of the antenna 4 x M6 screws
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-20 °C to +55 °C
-25 °C to +70 °C
MTBF 3 x 10 5 hours
Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 (UL: for indoor use only)
Weight, approx. 3.3 kg
Approvals CE
FCC
IC
Harmless to heart pacemakers
UL 60950
Antennas
8.3 ANT D6
MOBY D
220 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
8.3.4 Transmission window
7UDQVPLVVLRQ
ZLQGRZ
)RU6
DPLQ
WKHWUDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZLVH[WHQGHG
3ODQYLHZ
6LGHYLHZ
6
DPLQ
6
DPD[
/
\
6
D
6
J
6
J
/
[
$17'
Lx = 520 mm
Ly = 420 mm
Figure 8-11 Transmission window for ANT D6
Antennas
8.3 ANT D6
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 221
8.3.5 Metal-free area
Flush-mounted in metal
D PP
0HWDO
DD
DD
Figure 8-12 Metal-free area for ANT D6
8.3.6 Minimum distance between antennas
Definition of distance D
'
'
'LVWDQFH'ุP
Figure 8-13 Distance D: ANT D6
Antennas
8.3 ANT D6
MOBY D
222 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
8.3.7 Dimension drawing
0WKUHDGHGEXVK
Figure 8-14 Dimension drawing for ANT D6
Antennas
8.4 ANT D10
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 223
8.4 ANT D10
8.4.1 Features
ANT D10 Features
Applications Storage, logistics and distribution, e.g. clothing industry,
laundries
Particularly when small MDS are used (e.g. MDS D124,
MDS D160) and when there is a long transmission field
Writing/reading distance Up to 480 mm (depending on MDS)
Connecting cable 3.3 m; included in scope of supply
Covering hood Available as accessory
Connectable SLG
SLG D10/D10S
8.4.2 Ordering data
Table 8- 10 Ordering data of ANT D10
ANT D10 Order No.
Dimensions L x W x H in mm: 1150 x 365 x 115 (with cover)
Antenna cable included in scope of supply
6GT2698-5AF00
Table 8- 11 Ordering data of ANT D10 accessories
Accessories Order No.
Antenna duplexer
(with 1 antenna connecting cable 3.3 m)
6GT2690-0AC00
Length 3.3 m 6GT2691-0CH33 Antenna cable
Length 10.5 m 6GT2691-0CN10
Antenna extension, length 7.2 m 6GT2691-0DH72
Antennas
8.4 ANT D10
MOBY D
224 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
8.4.3 Technical data
Table 8- 12 Technical specifications for ANT D10
Max. write/read distance
ANT to MDS (Sg)
480 mm
Dimensions in mm (L x W x H) 1150 x 365 x 115
(with cover)
Color Gray/black
Material Aluminum/plastic
Plug connection 1-pin TNC connector
Max. power 10 W (FCC/IC: 2.5 W)
Antenna cable length 3.3 m
Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7
Class 7M2
Total shock response spectrum Type II
30 g
Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class
7M2
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Attachment of the antenna 4 x M6 screws
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-20 °C to +55 °C
-25 °C to +70 °C
MTBF 3 x 10 5 hours
Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 (UL: for indoor use only)
Weight, approx. 10 kg
(with cover)
Approvals CE
FCC
IC
Harmless to heart pacemakers
UL 60950
Antennas
8.4 ANT D10
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 225
8.4.4 Transmission window
7UDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZ
)RU6
DPLQ
WKHWUDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZLVH[WHQGHG
3ODQYLHZ
6LGHYLHZ
$17'ZLWKFRYHU
6
DPLQ
6
DPD[
/
\
6
D
6
J
/
[
6
J
Lx 1050 mm
Ly 350 mm
Figure 8-15 Transmission window for ANT D10
Antennas
8.4 ANT D10
MOBY D
226 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
8.4.5 Metal-free area
Flush-mounted in metal
DD
DD
0HWDO
D PP
Figure 8-16 Metal-free area for ANT D10
When installing in the vicinity of metal, observe the instructions in the Section .
Antennas
8.4 ANT D10
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 227
8.4.6 Minimum distance between antennas
Definition of distance D
'LVWDQFH'ุP
'
'
Figure 8-17 Distance D: ANT D10
Antennas
8.4 ANT D10
MOBY D
228 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
8.4.7 Dimension drawing
*HZLQGHEXFKVH0
02%<'
Figure 8-18 Dimension drawing for ANT D10
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 229
System integration 9
Application area
The ASM interface modules are links between the MOBY D components SLG/MDS and the
higher-level control systems (e.g. SIMATIC S7) or PC or computers. Depending on the
interface module used, up to two SLGs can be connected.
Design and functions
The ASM comprises a microcontroller system with an individual program (PROM). The CPU
receives commands over the user interface and saves them in RAM. The user receives an
acknowledgement that the command has arrived. If the command is valid, the CPU starts to
process it.
System integration
MOBY D
230 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Overview
Table 9- 1 Overview of interface modules
ASM type Interfaces to
PC/computer
Interfaces to SLG Function
blocks
SLG
connections
Dimensions
(W x H x D
in mm)
Temperature
range
(during
operation)
Degree
of
protectio
n
ASM 452 PROFIBUS
DP-V1
2 x 5-pin BERO
connector
FC 45 1 134 x 110 x 55 0 to +55 °C IP67
ASM 456 PROFIBUS
DP-V1
2 x 8-pin
connection socket,
M12
FC 45
FB 45
FC 55
FB 55
2
(simultaneo
usly)
60 x 210 x 54 or
79
0 to +55 °C IP67
ASM 473 For inserting
in
ET 200X
2 x 5-pin
BERO connector
FC 45 1 87 x 110 x 55 0 to +55 °C IP67
ASM 475 For inserting
in
S7-300/
ET 200M
Through screw-
type terminals
FC 45 2
(simultaneo
usly)
40 x 125 x 120 0 to +60 °C IP20
RF170C Can be
plugged into
ET 200pro
8-pin M12
connector
FC 45
FB 45
FC 55
FC 56
2
(simultaneo
usly) 1)
90 x 130 x 60 -25 to +55 °C IP67
RF180C PROFINET 8-pin M12
connector
FB 45 2
(simultaneo
usly) 1)
60 x 210 x 30 0 to +60 °C IP67
RF182C TCP/IP 2 x 8-pin
connection socket,
M12
-- 2
(simultaneo
usly)1)
60 x 210 x 30 0 to +60 °C IP67
1) If 2 readers are used on one ASM, the following restrictions apply:
The maximum operating temperature is 35 °C
The input voltage is 24 V ±10%
Current consumption ≤ 425 mA per reader
System integration
9.1 ASM 452
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 231
9.1 ASM 452
9.1.1 Application area
The ASM 452 interface module is a MOBY module for operating MOBY components over
PROFIBUS DP-V1 on
● Any computers and PCs
● Any PLCs
When operating the interface module on a SIMATIC S7, function blocks are made available
to the user.
Figure 9-1 ASM 452 interface module
9.1.2 Features
The ASM 452 is the result of consistent development of the familiar ASM 450 interface
modules. Optimal data throughput can be achieved even in large-scale PROFIBUS
configurations thanks to the use of acyclic data traffic on PROFIBUS DP V1. The minimum
cyclic data load of the ASM 452 on the PROFIBUS DP provides the user with the guarantee
that other PROFIBUS nodes (e.g. DI/DO) can still be processed at great speed.
The ASM 452 is an interface module for communication between PROFIBUS DP and the
SLG D1xS with RS 422. The data on the MDS D139/D160 can be physically addressed
("standard" addressing) through the ASM 452.
In SIMATIC S7, FC 45 is available for "standard" addressing.
The FC 45 provides the S7 user with an interface with powerful commands that is easy to
operate. FC 45 also offers command concatenation (not with SLG D11S ANT D5 and
SLG D12S) and S7 data structures with UDTs.
System integration
9.1 ASM 452
MOBY D
232 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
9.1.3 Configuration
Hardware description
The ASM 452 has the same housing as the distributed I/O system ET 200X. General
information on ASM 452 (e.g. assembly, operation and wiring; general technical data) is
available in the ET200X manual (Order No. 6ES7198-8FA00-8AA0). Descriptions of
accessories and network components can also be found in this manual.
9
IRU$60
6/*'6$17'
7RIXUWKHU
352),%86
QRGHV
352),%86&DEOH
352),%86'3
PDVWHUPRGXOH
HJ6&38
$7FRPS3&
0'6'
Figure 9-2 ASM 452 configurator
System integration
9.1 ASM 452
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 233
9.1.4 PROFIBUS DP communication
9.1.4.1 PROFIBUS DP configuring
The ASM 452 is integrated into the hardware configuration by means of a GSD file. The
ASM can then be configured using the HW Config of SIMATIC Manager or another
PROFIBUS DP tool.
A GSD file is provided for ASM 452 on the "MOBY software" CD.
9.1.4.2 Operating mode of the ASM 452
The approved operating modes of ASM 452 are described in the GSD file. It is set using the
hardware configuration tool (e.g. STEP 7 HW Config).
9.1.4.3 PROFIBUS DP diagnostics
The following table lists possible error indications with their meanings and provides
remedies.
Table 9- 2 LED indication for PROFIBUS DP diagnostics
"BF" LED "SF" LED Cause of error Error management
ASM 452 is in start-up mode. -
Communication to the DP master
is down.
ASM 452 not detecting a baud
rate.
Check the PROFIBUS DP
connection.
Check the DP master.
On *
Bus interruption
DP master is out of service
Check all cables on your
PROFIBUS DP network.
Check whether the connector
plugs for PROFIBUS DP are
securely plugged into the
ASM 452.
flashes On The configuration data sent to
the ASM 452 by the DP master
do not match the configuration of
the ASM 452.
Check the configuration of
the ASM 452 (input/output,
PROFIBUS DP address).
Correct GSD file being used?
– SIEM80B6.GSD for
ASM 452
flashes off ASM 452 has detected the baud
rate, but is not being addressed
by the DP Master.
ASM 452 has not been
configured.
Check the PROFIBUS DP
address set on the ASM 452
or in the configuration
software.
Check the configuration of
the ASM 452 (station type).
On flashes There is a hardware defect in the
ASM 452.
Replace the ASM 452.
System integration
9.1 ASM 452
MOBY D
234 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
9.1.4.4 PROFIBUS DP address and terminating resistor
You must remove the connector plate from the ASM before you set the
PROFIBUS DP address or connect the terminating resistor. The connector plate covers the
DIL switch. The position of the DIL switch in ASM is shown in the figure below with one
setting example for each case.
21
2II
RQ
([DPSOH352),%86DGGUHVVRQGHOLYHU\
([DPSOH7HUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRU2II
$VGHOLYHUHGVWDWH
6WDQGDUG
PRGH
XVH*6'ILOH
6,(0%
Figure 9-3 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address/connecting the terminating resistor
Note
The PROFIBUS DP address in ASM 452 must always match the PROFIBUS DP address
defined in the configuring software for this ASM.
To ensure that the terminating resistor functions correctly, you must always switch both
DIL switches of the terminating resistor to "on" or "off".
System integration
9.1 ASM 452
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 235
9.1.5 Device connections
9.1.5.1 Reader connection system
An SLG always occupies two M12 connector sockets on the ASM 452.
A pre-assembled cable therefore ensures easy connection of the SLG (see figure below).
The standard version of the connection cable is 2 m in length, other lengths of 5 m and 20 m
are available.
ZKLWH
EURZQ
JUHHQ
\HOORZ
JUD\
VKLHOG
7ZRSLQ0
FLUFXODUFRQQHFWRUV
SLQVXE'
IHPDOHVFUHZ
ORFNLQJ
$60VLGH 6/*VLGH
&DXWLRQ
:KHQPHWDO6XE'FDVLQJVDUHXVHGRQWKH6/*VLGHWKHFDVLQJPXVWEH
FRQQHFWHGWRWKHFDEOHVKLHOG
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
; ;
Figure 9-4 Connecting cable ASM 452/473 ↔ SLG D1xS with RS 422 (6GT2491-1CH20)
An SLG cable connector with screw-type terminals is provided for users who want to
individually pre-assemble their own cables (see figure below). Cables and SLG cable
connectors can be ordered from the MOBY catalog.
System integration
9.1 ASM 452
MOBY D
236 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
6
6
6
6
6/*FDEOH*7$
3*FDEOHJODQG
PD[FDEOHGLDPHWHU
PPRQO\WLJKWHQDIWHU
DVVHPEOLQJSOXJ
VFUHZV
IRURSHQLQJ
WKHFRQQHFWRU
&RXSOHUSOXJIURP
0WR$60
&RQQHF
WRUSLQ :LUHFRORU
*UHHQ
ZKLWH
EURZQ
\HOORZ
*UD\
QF
QF
6KLHOG
&RQQHFWHG
WRSLQRI6/*
FRQQHFWRU
&RQQHFWRUFRYHUUHPRYHG
'HJUHHRI
SURWHFWLRQ,3
Figure 9-5 Cable connector ASM 452/473 ↔ SLG D1xS with RS 422 (6GT2090-0BC00)
System integration
9.1 ASM 452
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 237
9.1.5.2 Pin assignments
The figure below illustrates the pin assignments of ASM 452.
6RFNHW
;DQG;
3LQDVVLJQPHQW
6LJQDO%UHG
3(
3(
6LJQDO$JUHHQ
/
0
6XSSO\
YROWDJH
/('VIRU02%<DQG$60
5[' 6/*DFWLYHZLWKFRPPDQG
35((55 0'6SUHVHQWRUHUURUGLVSOD\
35((55 )RU6/*
7KH0'6SUHVHQWGLVSOD\DOZD\V
WDNHVSULRULW\7KHHUURULVRQO\LQGLFDWHG
ZKHQDQ0'6LVQRWSUHVHQW
0'6SUHVHQW
7KH/('LVSHUPDQHQWO\21,IPRUHWKDQRQH
0'6
LVLQWKHILHOGWKHQXPEHURI0'6VLV
LQGLFDWHGE\VKRUWLQWHUUXSWLRQVRIWKH/('1R
HUURU
GLVSOD\LVRXWSXW
(UURUGLVSOD\
7KH/('LVSHUPDQHQWO\2))7KHODVW
HUURUQXPEHULVLQGLFDWHGZLWK
VKRUWIODVKHV
6/*b 6/*LVVHOHFWHG
6/* 6/*LVVHOHFWHG
2QO\6/*FDQEHVHOHFWHG
/('VIRU352),%86'3
6) 6\VWHP)DXOW
%) %XV)DXOW
21 /LWZKHQORJLFYROWDJHLVDSSOLHGWRWKH$60
LWLVJHQHUDWHGIURPWKH9VXSSO\YROWDJH
b9'& /LWZKHQ9VXSSO\YROWDJHLVDSSOLHG
WR$60
1RWFRQQHFWHG
3LQDVVLJQPHQW6/*6RFNHW
1RWDYDLODEOHIRU
02%<'
;;
;;
$60b
; ;
; ;
;
;
;
9'&
5['
35((55
6/*
5['
6/*
35((55
6)
%)
21
3(
/
0
3(
/
0
;
5['
7['
7['
5['
3(
; ;
9 9
'2 ',
9 9
'2 ',
3( 3(
352),%86'3
Figure 9-6 Pin assignment and LEDs of ASM 452
Note
With MOBY D, the SLG power supply cannot be connected through the ASM.
System integration
9.1 ASM 452
MOBY D
238 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
9.1.6 Cable
9.1.6.1 PROFIBUS DP cable with 24 V supply
The ASM 452 can also be operated with the "green" PROFIBUS DP cable. It is important to
ensure that a 24 V cable is connected from X12 to X13. The 24 V cable can be connected to
pins 5 and 6 in plug X12.
; ;
;
; ;
;
Figure 9-7 PROFIBUS DP cable with 24 V supply
9.1.6.2 Example of stripped lengths
The following diagram shows an example of stripped lengths. The lengths apply to all cables
which can be connected to the connector plugs. You must twist any shield braid present,
plug into a core end sleeve and cut off any excess.
7ZLVWHGDQG
WUXQFDWHG
VKLHOGEUDLGLQJ
Figure 9-8 Length of stripped insulation for PROFIBUS DP cables
System integration
9.1 ASM 452
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 239
9.1.7 Technical data
Table 9- 3 Technical specifications for ASM 452
ASM 452 with FC 45
Serial interface to the user PROFIBUS DP-V1
Procedure after connection EN 50170 Vol. 2 PROFIBUS DP
PG 11 cable gland
PROFIBUS DP and power supply connectors are not
included in the scope of delivery
Data transfer rate 9600 baud to 12 Mbaud (automatic detection)
Max. block length 2 words cyclic/240 bytes acyclic
Serial interface to write/read device
Connectors 2 x M12 coupler plug
Max. cable length 2 m = Standard length;
other preassembled cables: 5 m, 20 m
(to 1000 m on request)
Connectable SLGs 1x SLG D1xS with RS 422
Software functions
Programming Depending on the PROFIBUS DP master
Function blocks for SIMATIC S7 FC 45
MDS addressing Direct access via addresses
Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS,
write data to MDS, etc.
Multi-tag capability no
S7 data structures via UDTs Yes
Power supply 1
Rated value 24 V DC
Permitted range 20 V to 30 V DC
Current consumption Max. 180 mA; typ. 130 mA (without SLG, no load on DO)
Digital Inputs None
Digital outputs None
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +55°C
Transport and storage -40 °C to +70 °C
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 134 x 110 x 55 (without bus connector)
Mounting technique 4 M5 screws;
for mounting on any plate or wall
Weight, approx. 0.5 kg
Degree of protection IP67
MTBF (at 40 °C) 30 • 104 hours = 34 years
1) With MOBY D, the SLG power supply cannot be connected through the ASM.
System integration
9.1 ASM 452
MOBY D
240 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
9.1.8 Dimension diagram
The following figure shows the dimensional drawing of an ASM 452 with bus connectors.
You must add the length of the PG cable gland and the radius of the cable used to the
measured overall width and depth.
Figure 9-9 Dimensional drawing of ASM 452
System integration
9.1 ASM 452
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 241
9.1.9 Ordering data
Table 9- 4 Ordering data for ASM 452
Designation Order No.
ASM 452 interface module for PROFIBUS DP-V1
1x SLG D1xS with RS 422 can be connected
6GT2002-0EB20
Accessories:
Connector for PROFIBUS DP and 24 V supply 6ES7194-1AA01-0XA0
SLG cable ASM 452 ↔ SLG D1xS
Length 2 m; standard cable 6GT2491-1CH20
Other lengths:
5 m 6GT2491-1CH50
20 m 6GT2491-1CN20
Opt. Cable connector without SLG cable
(for cable lengths > 20 m) ASM 452 ↔ SLG
6GT2090-0BC00
M12 blanking cap for unused SLG connection
(1 pack = 10 pieces)
3RX9802-0AA00
CD
RFID Systems Software & Documentation
with FC 45, GSD file
6GT2080-2AA10
FC 45 Reference Manual
German
English
French
Available in electronic form on the
CD
RFID-Systems Software & Documentation
Connector plate; T functionality for PROFIBUS
DP connection
6ES7194-1FC00-0XA0
System integration
9.2 ASM 456
MOBY D
242 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
9.2 ASM 456
Configured with ASM 456
352),%86'3
0DVWHUPRGXOH
6,0$7,&b6
9IRU
$60DQGUHDGHU
WRIXUWKHU352),%86
EXVQRGHV
$60b
7DJV0'6
7DJV0'6
9WRIXUWKHU
352),%86
EXVQRGHV
HJ
6/*'6
SOXJLQ
YHUVLRQ
HJ
6/*'6
SOXJLQ
YHUVLRQ
352),%86
Figure 9-10 Configuration of ASM 456
For more detailed information, refer to ASM 456 Operating Instructions
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/32629442).
System integration
9.3 ASM 473
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 243
9.3 ASM 473
9.3.1 Application area
The ASM 473 interface module is a MOBY module for SIMATIC S7. It can be plugged into
the ET 200X distributed I/O station and DESINA. ET 200X is operated by the user over
PROFIBUS DP V1. An S7-300 or S7-400 with integrated PROFIBUS DP connection can be
used as the controller.
Figure 9-11 ASM 473 interface module
9.3.2 Features
ASM 473 supplements the SIMATIC S7 MOBY interface module ASM 475. The IP67 degree
of protection means that it can be installed and operated in the process without the need for
an additional protective housing.
To operate the ASM 473, an ET 200X basic module BM 141/142 with the order number
6ES7141-1BF11-0XB0 or 6ES7142-1BD21-0XB0 or a BM 143 is required.
The MDS data are accessed by means of physical addressing of the MDS.
For operation in a SIMATIC S7, the function FC 45 is available. The hardware of the ASM
473 is configured with an object manager (OM) that is integrated in the SIMATIC Manager.
Other features:
● Up to 7 ASM 473 interface modules can be operated simultaneously in an ET 200X
station.
● Any other I/O modules from the ET 200X spectrum can be operated with the ASM 473.
System integration
9.3 ASM 473
MOBY D
244 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
9.3.3 Basic module - Requirements for operation of ASM 473
The following table indicates the status of the ET 200X basic module of 10/2002. The
functionality of new basic modules is stored in HW Config of the SIMATIC Manager.
Table 9- 5 Requirements for operation of ASM 473
Order number of the ET 200X
basic module
For operation with ASM 473
(6GT2002-0HA00)*
For operation with ASM 473
PARAM (6GT2002-0HA10)
6ES7141-1BF00-0XB0 no no
6ES7141-1BF00-0AB0 Yes Yes
6ES7141-1BF01-0XB0 no no
6ES7141-1BF10-0XB0 no no
6ES7141-1BF11-0XB0 Yes Yes
6ES7141-1BF40-0AB0 Yes Yes
6ES7142-1BD10-0XB0 no no
6ES7142-1BD11-0XB0 no no
6ES7142-1BD20-0XB0 no no
6ES7142-1BD21-0XB0 Yes Yes
6ES7142-1BD22-0XB0 no Yes**
6ES7143-1BF00-0AB0 Yes Yes
6ES7143-1BF00-0XB0 Yes Yes
6ES7147-1AA00-0XB0 no no
6ES7147-1AA01-0XB0 no Yes
* Discontinued
** Notes on operation:
In HW Config, please parameterize the module 6ES7142-1BD21-0XB0.
System integration
9.3 ASM 473
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 245
9.3.4 Configuration
352),%86FDEOH
WRDOO352),%86
VODYHV
9SRZHUVXSSO\
%DVLFPRGXOH
HJ(7;%0
6/*'6$17'
0'6
352),%86'3PDVWHUPRGXOH
HJ6
FRQQHFWLRQRIDQRQ6LHPHQV
PDVWHUSRVVLEOHVRRQ
352),%86FDEOH
WRDOO352),%86
VODYHV
Figure 9-12 Configurator for ASM 473
Note
It differs from ASM 452 in that for ET 200X the 24 V supply must be connected to the
PROFIBUS DP connector and to the load voltage connector (see the ET 200X manual).
System integration
9.3 ASM 473
MOBY D
246 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
maximum configuration
8SWR$60PRGXOHVFDQEH
RSHUDWHGLQRQH(7;VWDWLRQ
Figure 9-13 Maximum configuration of ASM 473 on an ET 200X
Depending on the PROFIBUS DP master, up to 123 ET 200X modules can be run on one
PROFIBUS DP segment.
Hardware configuration
The ASM 473 is integrated in the hardware configuration of the SIMATIC Manager by calling
Setup.exe in the directory daten\S7_OM on the "Software MOBY" CD. Currently, the ASM
473 cannot be integrated in masters of other manufacturers.
System integration
9.3 ASM 473
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 247
9.3.5 Device connections
9.3.5.1 Reader connection system
A write/read device always occupies the two M12 connection sockets X3 and X4 on the ASM
473. A prefabricated cable makes it easy to connect the write/read device. The standard
version of the connecting cable is 2 m in length. Other cable lengths are available on
request.
For customers who want to assemble their own cables, an SLG cable connector with screw-
type terminals is available. Cables and SLG cable connectors can be ordered from the
MOBY catalog.
System integration
9.3 ASM 473
MOBY D
248 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
9.3.5.2 Pin assignments
The figure below illustrates the pin assignment for the write/read device and the display
elements.
2))
+]
+]
2))21
+]
+]
+]
2))
;
;
21SHUP
2))21
5['
7['
7['
5['
3(
9
QbF
9
QbF
3(
(5535(
[IODVK
HYHU\V
6RFNHW 3LQDVVLJQPHQW6/*
/('VIRU352),%86'3
*HQHUDOLQGLFDWRUV6)%)219'&DUHORFDWHGRQWKHEDVLFPRGXOH
RIWKH(7;
/('VIRU02%<
5[' 6/*DFWLYHZLWKFRPPDQG
35( ,QGLFDWHVWKHSUHVHQFHRIDQ0'6
(55 (UURULQGLFDWHGE\IODVKLQJVHTXHQFH
7KHIROORZLQJ$60VWDWHVDUHDOVRLQGLFDWHGZLWKWKH/('V35(DQG
(55
'HVFULSWLRQFDXVHVUHFWLILFDWLRQ
+DUGZDUHLVGHIHFWLYH5$0IODVK
&KDUJHULVGHIHFWLYHFDQRQO\EHUHSDLUHGLQWKH
IDFWRU\
)LUPZDUHORDGLQJLVDFWLYHRUQR
ILUPZDUHGHWHFWHG
ൺ/RDGILUPZDUH
ൺ$60PXVWQRWEHVZLWFKHGRIIXQWLOORDGHG
)LUPZDUHORDGLQJWHUPLQDWHGZLWKHUURUV
ൺ5HVWDUWUHTXLUHG
ൺ/RDGILUPZDUHDJDLQ
ൺ&KHFNXSGDWHILOHV
2SHUDWLQJV\VWHPHUURU
ൺ6ZLWFK$60RU(7;EDVHVWDWLRQ2))21
$60KDVERRWHGDQGLVZDLWLQJIRUD5(6(7
LQLWBUXQIURPWKHXVHU
Figure 9-14 Interfaces and indicators of the ASM 473
System integration
9.3 ASM 473
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 249
Note
With MOBY D, the SLG power supply cannot be connected through the ASM.
System integration
9.3 ASM 473
MOBY D
250 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
9.3.6 Technical data
Table 9- 6 Technical specifications for ASM 473
Interface for ET 200X SIMATIC S7 I/O bus
cyclic/acyclic services
Communication 2 words cyclic/238 bytes acyclic
Command buffer in ASM 142 x 238 bytes
Serial interface to write/read device
Connectors
Max. cable length
Connectable SLGs
2 x M12 coupler plug
2 m = standard length; other pre-assembled
cables = 5 m, 20 m (up to 1000 m on request)
1 x SLG D1xS with RS 422
Connectors 2 x M12 coupler plug
Max. cable length 2 m = standard length; other pre-assembled
cables = 5 m, 20 m (up to 1000 m on request)
Connectable SLGs 1 x SLG D1xS with RS 422
Software functions
Programming Depending on the PROFIBUS DP master
Function blocks for SIMATIC S7 FC 45
MDS addressing Direct access via addresses
Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to
MDS, etc.
PROFIBUS DP diagnostics Yes; in accordance with ET 200X basic station
S7 diagnostics Yes, can be called up via S7 OM
Reloadable firmware Yes, via S7 OEM
Power supply 1
Rated value
Permitted range
24 V DC
20.4 V to 28.8 V DC
Current consumption Typ. 75 mA; max. 500 mA
(or see Technical Data of the connected SLG)
Power dissipation of the module Typ. 1.6 W
Digital outputs/inputs Via expansion modules from the ET 200X
spectrum
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
0 to +55°C
-40 to +70°C
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
Single unit
Width module
87 x 110 x 55
60 x 110 x 55
Mounting technique 2 M5 screws (customer side)
2 M3 screws (product side)
Degree of protection IP67
System integration
9.3 ASM 473
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 251
Weight, approx. 0.275 kg
1) With MOBY D, the SLG power supply cannot be connected through the ASM.
Assembly instructions as well as general technical data can be found in the
ET 200X manual
(Order No. 6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0).
9.3.7 Dimension diagram
Dimensioned Drawing for Fixing Holes
The figure below shows the dimensions for the position of the holes for the fixing screws for
a basic module and an ASM 473 expansion module.
%0 $60b
Q[
Q 1XPEHURIH[SDQVLRQPRGXOHV
)RU0IL[LQJ
VFUHZ
Figure 9-15 Dimensions for fixing holes for basic modules and expansion modules
System integration
9.3 ASM 473
MOBY D
252 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
9.3.8 Ordering data
Table 9- 7 Ordering data for ASM 473
Order No.
ASM 473 interface module
1x SLG D1xS with RS 422 can be connected
6GT2002-0HA10
Accessories:
SLG cable ASM 473 ↔ SLG D1xS
Length 2 m; standard cable 6GT2491-1CH20
Other lengths:
5 m 6GT2491-1CH50
20 m 6GT2491-1CN20
Opt. Cable connector without SLG cable ASM
473 ↔ SLG (for cable lengths > 20 m)
6GT2090-0BC00
CD
RFID Systems Software & Documentation
with FC 45, GSD file
6GT2080-2AA10
FC 45 Reference Manual
German
English
French
Available in electronic form on the CD
RFID Systems Software & Documentation
System integration
9.4 ASM 475
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 253
9.4 ASM 475
9.4.1 Application area
The ASM 475 interface module can be inserted in SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M and can
be used for all MOBY systems.
As many as eight ASM 475 interface modules can be plugged into one SIMATIC S7-300
rack and operated. In a configuration with several racks (max. four), the ASM 475 can be
plugged into and operated on any rack. This means that as many as 32 ASMs can be
operated in the maximum configuration of a SIMATIC S7-300. The ASM can also be
operated in the ET 200M distributed I/O on PROFIBUS DP. Operation in an S7-400
environment is therefore problem-free. Up to 8 ASMs can be operated on each ET 200M.
Figure 9-16 ASM475 interface module
FC 45 with project example
You can load the FC with a project example from the corresponding subdirectory on the CD
RFID Systems Software & Documentation
using the "Dearchive file" function of SIMATIC
Manager. You will then find the project example in the S7PROJ directory of SIMATIC
Manager.
Directory in
RFID Systems Software & Documentation
SIMATIC Manager project name SIMATIC Manager path name
FC 45 MOBY FC45 Moby_f_l
System integration
9.4 ASM 475
MOBY D
254 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
9.4.2 Features
Error messages and operating states are indicated by LEDs.
A configuration that is resistant to interference is possible due to electrical isolation between
the write/read device and the SIMATIC S7-300 bus.
The ASM 475 with the order number 6GT2002-0GA10 is a parameterizable module. The
basic functions of the module are then already specified when the module is configured in
HW Config (e.g. standard addressing).
The data in the MDS is accessed direct by means of physical addresses using the ASM 475.
Operation in a SIMATIC S7 is controlled by the function FC 45.
ASM 475 and FC 45 form a unit that is used for reading the data of the MDS easily and at
optimal speed. A 32 KB MDS memory can be read in 24 seconds almost totally
independently of the S7 cycle time.
9.4.3 Configuration
7HUPLQDOHOHPHQW
(6%$$$
7HUPLQDOHOHPHQW
(6$$$$
IRUPRGXOHV
6/*'6
SOXJLQYHUVLRQ
6/*'6
SOXJLQYHUVLRQ
$60
Figure 9-17 Configuration for ASM 475 (centralized layout)
System integration
9.4 ASM 475
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 255
wiring
The ASM 475 is started up as follows:
1. Install the module
2. Install the module on the standard rail of the S7-300
(see the
S7-300 manual
)
Note
Before the module is mounted, the CPU of the S7-300 must be switched to the STOP
state.
WARNING
Always switch off power before you start wiring the S7-300.
Note
To ensure problem-free operation of ASM 475, it is essential that the ASM and the SIMATIC
CPU (or ASM and IM 153 for ET 200M operation) are operated with the same supply
voltage.
If this is not the case, when the ASM is switched on, it is possible that error flags on the CPU
will not be reset.
Configuring the ASM for SIMATIC S7 under STEP 7
Note
For MOBY installation, STEP 7 software must be available for use on the PC/PG.
Please ensure that you use the most recent STEP 7 version.
ASM 475 is installed and configured in the SIMATIC controller using an installation program.
The installation program is supplied on the CD
RFID-Systems Software & Documentation
(6GT2080-2AA10).
Installation
The installation instructions can be found on the CD
RFID Systems Software & Documentation
.
System integration
9.4 ASM 475
MOBY D
256 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
9.4.4 Configuration
Front panel
The figure below illustrates the bezel of the ASM 475 and the inside of the front door
complete with the associated connection diagram. The write/read devices must be
connected to the ASM in accordance with the connection diagram.
6WDWXVDQGHUURUGLVSOD\V &RQQHFWLRQGLDJUDP
7KHQXPEHUVRIWKH
FRQQHFWLRQVUHIHUWR
&RQQHFWRU;RIWKH
WRSHQFORVXUHVHFWLRQ
$60
02%<
6/*b
6
6
(
(
6
6
(
(
6)
9'&
$&7B
(55B
35(B
5['B
$&7B
(55B
35(B
5['B
6/*b
*7b*$
Figure 9-18 Bezel and inside of the front door of the ASM 475
Note
With MOBY D, the SLG power supply cannot be connected through the ASM (exception:
SLG D12S (plug-in version)).
System integration
9.4 ASM 475
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 257
9.4.5 PROFIBUS DP communication
9.4.5.1 Diagnosis using LEDs
Display elements on the ASM
Table 9- 8 Function of the LEDs on the ASM 475
Light emitting diode Meaning
SF System fault (hardware error on ASM)
5 V DC 24 V are connected to the ASM and the 5 V voltage on the ASM is OK.
ACT_1, ACT_2 The corresponding write/read device is active in processing a user command.
ERR_1, ERR_2 A flashing pattern indicates the last error to occur. This display can be reset
using the parameter Option 1.
PRE_1, PRE_2 Indicates the presence of an MDS.
RxD_1, RxD_2 Indicates continuous communication to the SLG. Faults on the SLG can also
cause this indicator to be lit.
On the ASM 475, further operating states are indicated with the LEDs PRE, ERR and SF:
Table 9- 9 Operating status display on ASM 475 via LEDs
SF PRE_1 ERR_1 PRE_2 ERR_2 Meaning
ON OFF/ON ON
(perm.)
OFF/ON ON
(perm.)
Hardware is defective (RAM, Flash, etc.)
ON OFF ON OFF OFF Charger is defective (can only be repaired in
the factory).
OFF 2 Hz OFF 2 Hz OFF Firmware loading is active or no firmware
detected
Firmware download
ASM must not be switched off
OFF 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz Firmware loading
terminated with errors
Restart required
Load firmware again
Check update files
Any 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz Operating system error
Switch ASM off/on
OFF OFF 1 flash
every 2 s
OFF 1 flash
every 2 s
ASM has booted and is waiting for a RESET
(init_run) from the user.
System integration
9.4 ASM 475
MOBY D
258 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
9.4.6 Device connections
9.4.6.1 Wiring to the SLG
SLG D1x / SLG D1xS connection method
The following figure shows the structure of a connecting cable between the ASM and SLG.
The specified colors apply to the standard MOBY cable for ASM 475.
&DEOHZLWKZLUHHQGIHUUXOHV
ZKLWH
EURZQ
JUHHQ
\HOORZ
JUD\
VKLHOG
&DEOHVKLHOGH[SRVHG
SLQVXE'
IHPDOHVFUHZ
ORFNLQJ
$60VLGH 6/*VLGH
&DXWLRQ
:KHQPHWDO6XE'FDVLQJVDUHXVHGRQWKH6/*VLGHWKHFDVLQJPXVW
EHFRQQHFWHGWRWKHFDEOHVKLHOG
Figure 9-19 Wiring from ASM 475 to SLG D1xS with RS422 (6GT2491-0E...)
System integration
9.4 ASM 475
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 259
SLG D12S (plug-in version) connection method
The connecting cable has a length of 2 m (standard) and 5 m. Extensions up to 1000 m are
possible with the 6GT2891-0F… plug-in cables.
&DEOHZLWKHQGVOHHYHV
JUD\
SLQN
\HOOR
Z
EURZQ
ZKLWH
VKLHOG
&DEOHVKLHOGH[SRVHG
$60VLGH 6/*VLGH
*7(ZLWKVWUDLJKW6/*FRQQHFWRUVWDQGDUG
JUHHQ
6/*FRQQHFWRU
VRFNHW
0SLQ
Figure 9-20 Connecting cable between ASM 475 and SLG D12S (plug-in version) with RS422
9.4.6.2 Shield connection
7HUPLQDOHOHPHQW +ROGLQJFOLS
&DEOHWR6/* &DEOHWR6/*
Figure 9-21 Configuration of ASM 475 with shield connecting element
System integration
9.4 ASM 475
MOBY D
260 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
9.4.6.3 Lightning protection
Implement lightning protection provided that it is appropriate for your application. An
individual appraisal of the entire plant is necessary before initiating any lightning protection
measures.
9.4.7 Cable
9.4.7.1 Cable assembly by the customer
To achieve electromagnetic compatibility, the SLG cable must be routed via an S7-300
shield connecting element. When the customer assembles the SLG cable, the cable shield
must be exposed (see the figure below).
'LPHQVLRQVLQPP
Figure 9-22 Exposure of the cable shield for cable assembly by the customer
System integration
9.4 ASM 475
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 261
9.4.8 Technical data
Table 9- 10 Technical specifications for ASM 475
ASM 475 with FC 45
Serial interface for SIMATIC S7-300
or ET 200M
I/O bus; cyclic and acyclic services
Communication 2 words cyclic/238 bytes acyclic
Command buffer in ASM 475 70 x 238 bytes per SLG D1xS
Serial interface to write/read device
Connectors Via screw-type terminal on front connector
The front connector is not included in the scope
of supply.
Max. cable length Pre-assembled cables = 5 m, 20 m, 50 m
(up to 1000 m on request)
Connectable SLGs 2x SLG D1xS with RS 422
Simultaneous operation
Software functions
Programming Depending on the PROFIBUS DP master
Function blocks for SIMATIC S7 FC 45
MDS addressing Direct access via addresses
Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data
to MDS
Multitag mode no
S7 data structures via UDTs Yes
Power supply 1
Rated value
Permitted range
24 V DC
20.4 V to 28.8 V DC
Current consumption
Without SLG for U = 24 V DC, max.
With SLG connected, max.
350 mA
500 mA, per connected SLG
Power dissipation of the module, typ. 2 W
Current consumption from I/O bus, max. 80 mA
Electrical isolation between S7-300 and MOBY Yes
V24 fuse to SLG Yes, electronic
Ambient temperature
During operation
Horizontal installation of SIMATIC
Vertical installation of SIMATIC
Transport and storage
0 to +60 °C
0 to +40 °C
-40 °C to +70 °C
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 40 x 125 x 120
Weight approx. 0.2 kg
Degree of protection IP20
1) With MOBY D, the SLG power supply cannot be connected through the ASM.
System integration
9.4 ASM 475
MOBY D
262 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
9.4.9 Ordering data
Table 9- 11 Ordering data for ASM 475
Order No.
ASM 475 interface module for SIMATIC S7
2 x SLG D1xS with RS 422 can be connected in
parallel, without front connector
6GT2002-0GA10
Accessories:
Front connector (1 x per ASM) 6ES7392-1AJ00-0AA0
SLG cable ASM 475 ↔ SLG D1xS; without SLG D12S (plug-in version)
Lengths:
5 m 6GT2491-0EH50
20 m 6GT2491-0EN20
50 m 6GT2491-0EN50
SLG cable ASM 475 ↔ SLG D12S (plug-in version)
Opt. Cable connector without SLG cable
(for cable lengths > 50 m) ASM 475 ↔ SLG
6GT2090-0BC00
Terminal element (1 x for each SLG cable) 6ES7390-5BA00-0AA0
Shield connecting element 6ES7390-5AA00-0AA0
CD
RFID Systems Software & Documentation
with FC 45, S7 object manager
6GT2080-2AA10
FC 45 Reference Manual
German
English
French
Available in electronic form on the CD
RFID Systems Software & Documentation
System integration
9.5 RF170C
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 263
9.5 RF170C
Configured with RF170C
0'6
352),%86RU
352),1(7,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
0DVWHUPRGXOH
6,0$7,&b6
352),1(7
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
RU
,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH
(7SUR
9IRU
(7SUR5)&
DQG6/*
HJ
6/*'6
SOXJLQ
YHUVLRQ
HJ
6/*'6
SOXJLQ
YHUVLRQ
352),%86
6,0$7,&
5)&
Figure 9-23 Configuration of RF170C
For more detailed information, refer to SIMATIC RF170C Operating Instructions
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/32622825).
System integration
9.6 RF180C
MOBY D
264 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
9.6 RF180C
Configured with RF180C
352),1(7,2
0DVWHUPRGXOH
6,0$7,&b6
9IRU
5)&DQG6/*
WRIXUWKHU352),1(7
EXVQRGHV
9WRIXUWKHU
352),1(7EXVQRGHV
HJ
6/*'6
SOXJLQ
YHUVLRQ
HJ
6/*'6
SOXJLQ
YHUVLRQ
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
352),1(7
6,0$7,&
5)&
0'6
Figure 9-24 Configuration of RF180C
For more detailed information, refer to SIMATIC RF180C Operating Instructions
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/30012157).
System integration
9.7 RF182C
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 265
9.7 RF182C
Configuration with RF182C
9IRU
5)&DQGUHDGHU
7RDGGLWLRQDO352),1(7(WKHUQHWQRGHV
3&
352),1(7,2
0DVWHUPRGXOH
6,0$7,&b6
HJ
6/*'6
SOXJLQ
YHUVLRQ
HJ
6/*'6
SOXJLQ
YHUVLRQ
6,0$7,&
5)&
352),1(7,2 ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
7DJV0'6
Figure 9-25 Configuration with RF182C
For more detailed information, refer to SIMATIC RF182C Operating Instructions
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/38507897).
System integration
9.7 RF182C
MOBY D
266 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 267
Accessories 10
10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
10.1.1 Features
Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
(1) DC output 1
(2) DC output 2
(3) Mains connection
Features
Wide-range input (3) for use worldwide
Dimensions without mains cable: 175 x 85 x 35 mm
Dimensions including mains cable: 250 x 85 x 35 mm
CE-compliant (EU and UK versions)
UL-certified for US and Canada (US version)
Mechanically and electrically rugged design
Secondary side (1), (2): 24 V DC / 3 A
Short-circuit and no-load stability
Suitable for frame mounting
3 versions for use in the EU, UK, US
Accessories
10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
MOBY D
268 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Description
The wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems is a universal compact power
supply and provides the user with an efficient, cost-saving solution for many different mid-
range power supply tasks.
The primary switched power supply is designed for use on single-phase AC systems. The
two DC outputs (sockets) are connected in parallel and protected by a built-in current limiting
circuit against overload and short-circuits.
The device is vacuum-cast and prepared for Safety Class 2 applications. The EU and UK
versions satisfy the low-voltage guideline as well as the current EU standards for CE
conformity. Furthermore, the US version has been UL-certified for the US and Canada.
10.1.2 Scope of supply
● Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
● 2 m mains cable (country-specific)
● Protective cover for flange outlet
● Operating Instructions
10.1.3 Ordering data
Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF-systems
(100 - 240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A)
with 2 m connecting cable with country-specific plug
EU: 6GT2898-0AA00
UK: 6GT2898-0AA10
US: 6GT2898-0AA20
24 V-connecting cable, length 5 m 6GT2491-1HH50
Accessories
10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 269
10.1.4 Safety Information
WARNING
Danger to life
It is not permitted to open the device or to modify the device.
The following must also be taken into account:
Failure to observe this requirement shall constitute a revocation of the CE approval, UL
certification for the US and Canada as well as the manufacturer's warranty.
For installation of the power supply, compliance with the DIN/VDE requirements or the
country-specific regulations is essential.
The field of application of the power supply is limited to "Information technology in
electrical office equipment" within the scope of validity of the EN 60950/VDE 0805
standard.
When the equipment is installed, it must be ensured that the mains socket outlet is
freely accessible.
The housing can reach a temperature of +25 °C during operation without any adverse
consequences. It must, however, be ensured that the power supply is covered in the
case of a housing temperature of more than +25°C to protect persons from contact with
the hot housing. Adequate ventilation of the power supply must be maintained under
these conditions.
NOTICE
The wide-range power supply unit must only be used for SIMATIC products in the
specifically described operating range and for the documented intended use.
If the wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (MLFB: 6GT2 898-0AA20) is
used for an end product other than the SIMATIC RF600 system, the following must be taken
into account:
● The electric strength test of the end product is to be based upon a maximum working
voltage of: Transition from primary to SELV: 353 V DC, 620 Vpk
● The following secondary output circuits are SELV (low voltage; SELV = Safety Extra Low
Voltage): all
● The following secondary output circuits are at non-hazardous energy levels: all
● The power supply terminals and/or connectors are suitable for field wiring if terminals are
provided.
Accessories
10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
MOBY D
270 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
● The maximum investigated branch circuit rating is: 20 A
● The investigated pollution degree is: 2
WARNING
If the wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (MLFB: 6GT2 898-0AA20)
is connected to and in use for other products than the SIMATIC RF660R Portal Reader
(MLFB: 6GT2811-0AA01), the end user is responsible and liable for any operation of the
system or end product, which includes the wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC
RF systems (MLFB: 6GT2 898-0AA20).
WARNING
Alterations to the SIMATIC RF600 components and devices as well as the use of
SIMATIC RF600 components with third-party RFID devices are not permitted.
Failure to observe this requirement shall constitute a revocation of the radio equipment
approvals, CE approval and manufacturer's warranty. Furthermore, the compliance to
any salient safety specifications of VDE/DIN, IEC, EN, UL and CSA will not be
guaranteed.
Safety notes for the US and Canada
The SIMATIC RF660R Portal Reader (MLFB: 6GT2811-0AA01) is for use only with the wide-
range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (MLFB: 6GT2 898-0AA20) - as optional
component – or with power supplies which are UL-listed according to the safety standards
specified below:
● UL 60950-1 - Information Technology Equipment Safety - Part 1: General Requirements
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950 -1 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment.
WARNING
The compliance of the SIMATIC RF600 system to the safety standards mentioned
above will not be guaranteed if neither the wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC
RF systems (MLFB: 6GT2 898-0AA20) nor power supplies listed according to the safety
standards above are used.
Accessories
10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 271
10.1.5 Connecting
● There are three different (country-specific) mains cables for the EU, UK and US.
The appropriate mains cable must be connected to the primary input of the power supply.
NOTICE
It is only permissible to insert or remove the mains cable when the power supply is de-
energized.
● The wide-range power supply unit has total insulation (Safety Class 2), IP65
● It can be mounted using four fixing holes.
10.1.6 Technical specifications
Table 10- 1 General technical specifications
Insulation stability (prim./sec.) Uins p/s 3.3 kVAC
Insulation resistance Rins >1 GΩ
Leakage current Ileak U
in = 230 VAC, f = 50 Hz < 200 µA
Safety class (SELV) Designed for installation in devices of Safety Class 2
Mains buffering th U
in = 230 VAC ≥ 50 ms
Ambient temperature -25 °C to +55 °C
Surface temperature Module top, center Max. 96 °C
Storage temperature -40 °C to +85 °C
Self-heating on full-load max. 45 K
Interference immunity
ESD
HF fields
Burst
Surge
HF injection
Mains quality test
EN 61000-4-2,
4-3 up to 4-6, 4-11
Air discharge: 15 kV
10 V/m
symmetrical: 2
Symmetrical: 1
10 Vrms
Cooler Free convection
Dimensions L x W x H 175 mm x 85 mm x 35 mm
Weight 720 g
Housing / casting UL 94-V0
Power supply class according to CSA Level 3
Degree of protection IP 65
Accessories
10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
MOBY D
272 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Table 10- 2 Technical specifications for the input
Rated input voltage Uin EN 60950 / UL 60950 100 to 240 V AC
120 to 353 V DC
Input voltage range Uin 94 to 264 V AC
120 to 375 V DC
(UL: 353 VDC)
Input frequency fin 50/60 Hz
Radio interference level EN 55011/B
Switching frequency fsw approx. 70 kHz typ.
Length of cable 2 m
Table 10- 3 Technical specifications of the output
Output voltage tolerance ∆Uout U
in = 230 VAC U
out nom ≤ +2 %/-1 %
Overvoltage protection Uout nom +20 % typ.
Noise ∆ULF U
in = min., BW: 1 MHz ≤ 1 % Uout
Noise ∆UHF U
in = min., BW: 20 MHz ≤ 2 % Uout
Line Regulation
Load Regulation
Uin = min./max.
Iout = 10...90...10 %
≤ 1,0 %
≤ 1,0 %
Short-circuit current Imax I
nom = 4 A (+50°C) 105 up to 130 % Inom
Settling time tR load variations Iout = 10...90...10 % < 5 ms
Temperature coefficient ε TA = -25 °C to +70 °C 0.01 %/K
Overload behavior Pover Constant current
Short-circuit protection/
No-load response
Continuous/no-load stability
Derating TA > +50 °C to +70 °C max. 2 %/K
Connector type Flanged connector
Binder,
Order No.: 09-3431-90-04
4 pins
Table 10- 4 Output configurations
Input Outputs
U1 = U2
ILoad =
I1 + I2
Efficiency
(%)
Remarks
110 V AC 24 V DC 0 A No-load stability
110 V AC 24 V DC 3 A ≥ 88
220 V AC 24 V DC 0 A No-load stability
220 V AC 24 V DC 3 A ≥ 90
Accessories
10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 273
Table 10- 5 Compliance with standards
Designation Standard Values
Electrical safety EN 60950 / UL 60950 / CAN/CSA 22.2 950, 3 Edition
Conducted interference EN 61000-6-3
EN 55011
Class B
Emission EN 61000-6-3
EN 55011
Class B
All values are measured at full-load and at an ambient temperature of 25 °C (unless
specified otherwise).
10.1.7 Pin assignment of DC outputs and mains connection
DC outputs Assignment
(1) Ground (0V)
(2) +24 V DC
(3) +24 V DC
(4) Ground (0V)
Mains connection Assignment
(1) 100 to 240 V AC
(2) n.c.
(3) 100 to 240 V AC
(4) n.c.
Accessories
10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
MOBY D
274 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
10.1.8 Dimension drawing
s
s
s
Units of measurement:
All dimensions in mm
Accessories
10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 275
10.1.9 Certificates and approvals
Table 10- 6 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems 6GT2898-0AA00 - Europe,
6GT2898-0AA10 - UK
Certificate Description
CE approval to
2004/108/EC EMC
73/23/EEC LVD
Table 10- 7 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems 6GT2898-0AA20 - USA
Standard
This product is UL-certified for the US and Canada.
It meets the following safety standards:
UL 60950-1 - Information Technology Equipment Safety - Part 1:
General Requirements
CSA C22.2 No. 60950 -1 - Safety of Information Technology
Equipment
UL Report E 205089
Accessories
10.2 Mobile handheld terminals
MOBY D
276 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
10.2 Mobile handheld terminals
SIMATIC RF310M mobile handheld terminal
Suitable for all ISO versions of MDS D1xx, MDS D2xx, MDS D 3xx, MDS D4xx.
(Does not apply for MDS D139/MDS D160 with MLFBs 6GT2600-0AA00/6GT2600-0AB00).
For detailed information on the device, see SIMATIC RF310M Operating Instructions
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26009421).
MOBY STG Handheld Terminal PRO
Suitable for all MDS D1xx, MDS D2xx, MDS D3xx (not MDS D4XX).. No programming library
available.
For more detailed information on the device, see MOBY STG Handheld Terminal PRO
Operating Instructions (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26116402/0/en).
Accessories
10.3 MOBY antenna distributor
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 277
10.3 MOBY antenna distributor
Application area
The MOBY antenna distributor is a power distributor with electrical isolation between the
input (IN) and the two outputs (OUT1, OUT2). At the operating frequency of 13.56 MHz, the
impedance at all inputs and outputs is 50 Ohm.
The device is used to connect 2, 3 or 4 MOBY D antennas to one SLG D10/D10S write/read
device. Gate, C and tunnel arrangements are therefore possible (see configuration
possibilities).
Figure 10-1 MOBY antenna distributor
Ordering data
Table 10- 8 Ordering data for MOBY antenna distributor
Order No.
Antenna duplexer
(1 antenna cable included in scope of supply)
6GT2690-0AC00
Accessories:
Antenna cable, length 3.3 m
Antenna cable, length 10.5 m
Antenna extension, length 7.2 m
6GT2691-0CH33
6GT2691-0CN10
6GT2691-0DH72
Accessories
10.3 MOBY antenna distributor
MOBY D
278 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Technical data
Table 10- 9 Technical data for MOBY D antenna distributor
Max. input power 10 W
Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz
Power supply None
Enclosure dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 160 x 80 x 40 (without connector)
Color Anthracite
Material Plastic PA 12
Connector (inputs and outputs) TNC connector
Mounting 2 x M5 screws
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-25 °C to +65 °C
-25 °C to +75 °C
MTBF 3.0 x 10 5 hours
Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 (UL: for indoor use only)
Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2
Total shock response spectrum Type II
30 g
Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Weight, approx. 400 g
Approval CE
UL
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 279
Alarm, error and system messages 11
In this chapter, you will find a list of the MOBY D error messages. The messages are
subdivided into two groups:
● Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS
addressing)
● Error messages and causes for MOBY D in combination with the MDWAPI library
Alarm, error and system messages
11.1 Error messages and causes for MOBY D in combination with the MDWAPI library
MOBY D
280 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
11.1 Error messages and causes for MOBY D in combination with the
MDWAPI library
Table 11- 1 General errors
Error code
in HEX
Cause, remedy
0x00 OK:
Data/parameters read or saved without errors
Control command executed
Table 11- 2 Transponder status
Error code
in HEX
Cause, remedy
0x01 No transponder:
No transponder within the detection field of the reader
Transponder in detection field has been switched to silent
Error in communication between reader and transponder. The reader can no longer
detect the transponder.
0x02 Invalid data:
CRC16 checksum error in the received data
0x03 Write error:
Plausibility test of written data failed:
Attempt to write to a read-only area
Distance between transponder and read antenna too large
Attempt to write during excessive ambient noise
0x04 Address error:
The requested data lie beyond the logical or physical address range of the transponder:
The addresses lie outside the maximum address range of the transponder
The addresses lie outside the configured address range of the transponder
0x05 Invalid transponder type:
This command is not supported by this transponder:
Write or read attempt with a transponder
A specific command is not supported by the transponder.
0x06 Read error:
Plausibility test of read data failed:
Distance between transponder and read antenna too large
Attempt to read during excessive ambient noise
Alarm, error and system messages
11.1 Error messages and causes for MOBY D in combination with the MDWAPI library
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 281
Table 11- 3 Parameter status
Error code
in HEX
Cause, remedy
0x10 EEPROM error:
EEPROM of the reader cannot be write-accessed
Before the write procedure in the EEPROM, a faulty parameter checksum occurred.
0x11 Parameter outside the valid range:
Valid parameter range exceeded.
Table 11- 4 Interface status
Error code
in HEX
Cause, remedy
0x80 Unknown command:
Selected function not supported by reader
0x81 Length error:
Protocol is too long or too short
0x82 Command is not possible:
0x83 HF communication error:
An error occurred in the communication between the transponder and reader.
Possible causes:
Algorithm for collision handling was not performed until no more collisions were
detected. Reason for interruption:
– Timeout during communication with the host
0x94 Other data:
More transponder data records have been requested than the transponder protocol
is capable of transferring simultaneously.
0x95 ISO error:
Additional error code for ISO transponder was sent with the response data
Alarm, error and system messages
11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing)
MOBY D
282 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Table 11- 5 Error codes for ISO transponders
Error code
in HEX
Explanation of error codes in the transponder response
0x01 Command not supported (the request code was not recognized)
0x02 Command not recognized (e.g. due to a format error)
0x03 Option not supported
0x0F Unknown error
0x10 Specified block does not exist
0x11 Specified block is already disabled and cannot be disabled again
0x12 Specified block is disabled, its contents cannot be changed
0x13 Unsuccessful attempt to program the specified block
0x14 Unsuccessful attempt to disable the specified block
0xA0 -
0xDF
Error codes for user-specific commands
All others Reserved for future use
11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45
(direct MDS addressing)
11.2.1 General errors
Automation system switches to STOP
● OB 86 not programmed and a slave has failed.
● OB 122 not programmed and a slave has failed.
The error does not occur until FC/FB 45 is called.
● The pointer Params_DB, command_DB or DAT_DB does not exist or is pointing to a non-
existent address area.
Alarm, error and system messages
11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing)
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 283
11.2.2 Error messages
An error condition exists in FC/FB 45 whenever the "Error" variable is enabled on a channel.
If this is the case, the exact cause of the error can be determined from variable
"error_MOBY", "error_FC" or "error_BUS".
Table 11- 6 Classification of error messages
Error variable Classification
error_MOBY This error was reported by the MOBY-ASM / write/read device.
There are two main reasons for this:
Communication between ASM and write/read device or between
write/read device and MDS is faulty.
The ASM/SLG is unable to process the command.
Error_MOBY is indicated on the ASM on the ERR LED with an appropriate
flashing pattern.
error_FC This error is signaled by FC/FB 45.
Main cause
There is a parameter error in "Params_DB" or "command_DB".
error_BUS The transport layer of PROFIBUS DP is signaling an error. A PROFIBUS DP
tracer and a PROFIBUS DP tester (BT 200; Order No. 6ES7 181-0AA00-
0AA0) is an invaluable tool for accurate troubleshooting. The PROFIBUS DP
system diagnostics can provide further information about the cause of the
error. The error shown here is reported by the SFC 58/59 system function in
the RET_VAL parameter. For a detailed description of the RET_VAL
parameter, please refer to the SIMATIC S7 system manuals (see System
software for S7-300/400).
Note
When several errors occur with chained commands, the "error variable" always indicates the
first error detected.
Alarm, error and system messages
11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing)
MOBY D
284 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
error_MOBY
Table 11- 7 Error messages of the MOBY ASM/SLG via the "error_MOBY" variable
Error code in
HEX
Flashing of
ERR LED
Cause, remedy
00 - No error; result is OK
- 1x See error code 0F
01 2x Presence error: MDS has moved out of the transmission window of the
SLG. The MOBY command was executed only partially.
Read command:
No data are transmitted to FC/FB 45.
Write command:
The data storage unit which just left the field contains an incomplete
data record.
Distance between SLG and MDS not adhered to
Configuration error: The data block to be processed is too large (in
dynamic mode)
The next command (READ, WRITE) will be automatically executed on
the next MDS.
Note:
The error indication on the red LEDs on the front panel indicates error
code 02 in this case.
02 2x Presence error:
A mobile data storage unit has passed by an SLG without being
processed by a command.
Note:
The error indicatioin on the red error LEDs does not distinguish
between Error 01 and Error 02 (see error code 01).
03 3x Error in the connection to the SLG
Supply voltage for the ASM is less than 20 V or not connected
24 V voltage has voltage dips, is not connected or is switched off
Fuse on the ASM has blown. Check the wiring
Cable between ASM and SLG is wired incorrectly or cable break.
Hardware defect: ASM or SLG
Interference coupling on SLG cable or bus cable
Perform init_run after error correction.
04 4x Error in MDS's memory
The data storage unit has never been write-accessed or has lost the
contents of its memory due to battery failure.
Initialize data storage unit with the STG
With the SLG: Call initialization command
Check MDS battery or change MDS
Data storage unit is defective
05 5x Unknown command
Unknown command code in Byte 2 of the message frame
SLG signals data length error (check message frame)
Faulty length of useful data
Alarm, error and system messages
11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing)
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 285
Error code in
HEX
Flashing of
ERR LED
Cause, remedy
06 6x Field interference on SLG
The SLG is receiving interference from its environment.
MDS has left the field during communication.
Communication between SLG and MDS has been interrupted by
external interference.
The distance between two write/read devices is too small and does
not correspond to the configuration guidelines
Antenna error
Antenna is unscrewed
0A 10x Only during initialization: MDS is unable to perform the initialization
command.
MDS is defective.
0B 11x Memory of MDS cannot be read correctly.
0C 12x Memory of the MDS cannot be write-accessed.
Memory of the MDS is defective.
0D 13x Address error (address range overshoot)
Specified address does not exist on MDS
The command must be checked and corrected when the message
frame is created
The MDS is not the right type.
0F 15x Start message
This message is output by the ASM after every start. (A start occurs
after connection of the operating voltage, after operating the front
switch, after a rest via the X1 connector or following a bus error.) The
start message remains active until the user issues a RESET command
to the ASM. This enables the user to detect reconnection to the power
supply (and therefore operational readiness) on the ASM.
Execute an init_run
10 16x NEXT command is not possible.
SLG does not recognize NEXT command.
11 17x Short-circuit or overloading of 24 V outputs
Next command must be a RESET command.
The affected output is turned off.
All 24 V outputs are turned off when total overload occurs.
A reset can only be performed by turning the power supply off and
on again.
Then start init_run.
12 18x Internal ASM communication error
Connector contact problem on the ASM (send in ASM for repairs)
ASM hardware defect
Electromagnetic interference
Start init_run command after error correction.
13 19x ASM/SLG does not have enough buffer to store the command
intermediately.
Alarm, error and system messages
11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing)
MOBY D
286 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Error code in
HEX
Flashing of
ERR LED
Cause, remedy
14 20x Internal ASM error or SLG error (watchdog)
Program sequence error on the ASM
Switch 24 V supply off and on again
Program sequence error on the SLG
Start init_run command after error correction.
15 21x Wrong parameterization of the ASM/SLG
Check INPUT parameters in UDT 10.
RESET command is parameterized incorrectly.
After a start-up, the ASM has still not received an init_run.
16 22x The command cannot be processed with the current bus configuration.
Input or output areas too small for the specified message frame
length.
Was the correct GSD file used?
Write or read command issued with length specification too large.
Data length > 233 bytes.
Change the configuration of the bus in the master module
17 23x Communication error between FC/FB 45 and MOBY-ASM.
Handshake error
Params_DB (UDT 10) of this ASM station is being overwritten by
other parts of the program.
Check parameters of MOBY ASM in UDT 10
Check FC/FB 45 command which caused this error
Start init_run command after error correction.
18 24x An error has occurred which must be acknowledged with an init_run.
A temporary short circuit has occurred on PROFIBUS DP.
The RESET command is faulty.
Start init_run command after error correction.
19 25x Previous command is active or buffer overflow.
The user sent a new command to the ASM/SLG even though the last
command was still active.
Active command can only be terminated with an init_run.
Before a new command can be started the READY bit must be 1
(exception: init_run).
Two FC/FB 45 calls were parameterized with the same parameters
("ASM_address" and "ASM_channel")
Two FC/FB 45 calls are using the same Params_DB pointer
Start init_run command after error correction.
When command repetition (e.g., fixed code MDS) is used, no data
are fetched from the MDS. The data buffer on the ASM has
overflowed. MDS data have been lost.
Alarm, error and system messages
11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing)
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 287
Error code in
HEX
Flashing of
ERR LED
Cause, remedy
1A 26x PROFIBUS DP error occurred
The PROFIBUS DP bus connection was interrupted
– Wire break on the bus
– Bus connector on ASM was removed briefly
PROFIBUS DP master doesn't address ASM anymore.
Execute an init_run
The ASM has detected a message frame interruption on the bus.
The PROFIBUS DP may have been reconfigured (e.g. with HW
Config).
This error is only indicated when access monitoring has been enabled
in the PROFIBUS DP configuration.
1C 28x The antenna of the SLG is switched off/on and should be switched
on/off again.
The antenna is switched off and in this state, an MDS command should
be executed. The antenna should be switched off, even though one
MDS command is active.
The antenna is already switched off.
The antenna is already switched on.
Unknown mode in SET ANT command.
The antenna cannot be switched off, because an MDS command is
still active.
The antenna is switched off, so the MDS command cannot be
executed.
1D 29x More MDSes are in the transmission window than the SLG is capable
of processing simultaneously.
Only one MDS can be processed at a time with FC/FB 45
1E 30x Error when processing the function
The data in UDT 10 are invalid; check UDT 10 and execute init_run
ASM hardware is defective: ASM receives wrong data during
init_run.
AB byte does not comply with the useful data length.
1F 31x Running command canceled by RESET (init_run or cancel) or bus
connector removed
Communication with the MDS was terminated by init_run.
This error can only be reported on init_run or cancel
Alarm, error and system messages
11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing)
MOBY D
288 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
error_FC
Table 11- 8 Error variable "error_FC"
Error code
(B#16#..)
Description
00 No error; default value if everything is ok.
01 Params_DB not available in SIMATIC
02 Params_DB too small
UDT 10/11 was not used during definition
Params_DB must be 300 bytes in length (for each channel)
Check that Params_DB and Params_ADDR are correct
03 The DB after the "command_DB_number" pointer is not available in the SIMATIC.
04 "command_DB" in the SIMATIC too small
UDT 20/21 was not used during command definition
The last command in "command_DB" is a chained command; reset the chaining
bit
05 Invalid command type.
Check command pointer command_DB_number/command_DB_address
Check the current values in command_DB
– Execute an init_run
06 Unexpected acknowledgement received. The parameters of the command and
acknowledgement message frames do not match (command, length,
address_MDS).
The user changed the command_DB_number/_address pointer during command
execution.
The user changed the command parameters in the MOBY CMD data block (UDT
20) during command execution.
Check the ASM_address and ASM_channel parameter settings. ASM_address
and ASM_channel have the same parameters for different channels.
The acknowledgement counter and command counter between the ASM and
FC/FB are no longer synchronized
– Execute an init_run
07 The MOBY_mode or MDS_control parameter (defined in UDT 10) has an invalid
value
08 A bus error has occurred which is reported by system functions SFC 58/59. More
information on this error is available in the error_BUS variable.
ASM_address or ASM_channel not available
Execute an init_run
09 The ASM has failed.
Power failure on MOBY-ASM
PROFIBUS DP connector removed or PROFIBUS DP cable interrupted
ASM_address or ASM_channel not available
This error is indicated if the ASM_failure bit was set in OB 122. OB 122 is called if
FC/FB 45 can no longer access the cyclic word for MOBY-ASM.
Alarm, error and system messages
11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing)
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 289
Error code
(B#16#..)
Description
0A Another init_run was started without waiting for ready during execution of the
init_run command
Do
not
set init_run cyclically
The same physical ASM channel is used in two (or more) UDT 10 structures.
Check ASM_address and ASM_channel in
all
UDT 10 structures.
0B init_run cannot be executed; cyclic Process image for ASM is faulty; FC/FB 45
signals timeout of process image to ASM
This error can be deactivated by writing the value #00 to address DBB 58 in UDT
10. In certain error situations, FC/FB 45 will then, however, not generate an error
message and "seize up".
ASM_address in UDT 10 is parameterized incorrectly. ASM_address may be for
wrong module.
ASM_channel setting is ≥16 or ≤0
ASM hardware/firmware is faulty.
The same physical ASM channel is used in two (or more) UDT 10 structures.
Check ASM_address and ASM_channel in
all
UDT 10 structures.
0C Area length error on block move for FC/FB 45.
DAT_DB does not exist or is too small. Check DAT_DB_number and
DAT_DB_address in UDT 20
Execute an init_run
0D An init_run was not completed correctly. The process image is not consistent.
Run init_run again
Turn ASM off and on again.
The RUN/STOP switch on the CPU was pressed rapidly several times in
succession (particularly with slow PROFIBUS DP baud rates)
The same physical ASM channel is used in two (or more) UDT 10 structures.
Check ASM_address and ASM_channel in
all
UDT 10 structures.
Alarm, error and system messages
11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing)
MOBY D
290 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
error_BUS
Table 11- 9 Error variable "error_BUS"
Error code
(W#16#...)
Description
800A ASM is not ready (temporary message).
This message is given to a user who is not using FC/FB 45 and is polling the
ASMs acyclically, one after the other, very quickly.
8x7F Internal error on parameter x. Cannot be remedied by the user.
8x22
8x23
Area length error on reading parameter.
Area length error on writing parameter.
This error code indicates that parameter x is partially or completely
outside the operand area or the length of a bit array for an ANY parameter is not
divisible by 8.
8x24
8x25
Area error on reading parameter.
Area error on writing parameter.
This error code indicates that parameter x is within an area not allowed for the system
function.
8x26 Parameter contains a time cell number which is too high.
8x27 Parameter contains a counter cell number which is too high.
8x28
8x29
Alignment error on reading parameter.
Alignment error on writing parameter.
The reference to parameter x is an operand whose bit address is not equal to 0.
8x30
8x31
The parameter is located within the write-protected global DB.
The parameter is located within the write-protected instance DB.
8x32
8x34
8x35
The parameter contains a DB number which is too high.
The parameter contains an FC number which is too high.
The parameter contains an FB number which is too high.
8x3A
8x3C
8x3E
The parameter contains a DB number which is not loaded.
The parameter contains an FC number which is not loaded.
The parameter contains an FB number which is not loaded.
8x42
8x43
An access error occurred while the system was attempting to read a parameter from
the I/O area of the inputs.
An access error occurred while the system was attempting to write a parameter to the
I/O area of the outputs.
8x44
8x45
Error on nth (n > 1) read access after an error occurred.
Error on nth (n > 1) write access after an error occurred.
8090 Specified logical base address is invalid: There is no assignment in the SDB1/SDB2x,
or it is not a base address.
8092 A type other than BYTE has been specified in an ANY reference.
8093 The area identifier contained in the configuration (SDB1, SDB2x) of the logical
address is not permitted for these SFCs. The following are permitted:
0 = S7-400
1 = S7-300
2, 7 = DP modules
Alarm, error and system messages
11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing)
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 291
Error code
(W#16#...)
Description
80A0 Negative acknowledgment while reading from module. FC/FB fetches
acknowledgment although no acknowledgment is ready.
A user who is not using the FC/FB 45 would like to fetch DS 101 (or DS 102 to 104)
although no acknowledgment is available.
Perform an init_run for new synchronization between ASM and application.
80A1 Negative acknowledgment while writing to the module. FC/FB sends command
although ASM is unable to receive a command.
80A2 DP protocol error in layer 2. Could be a hardware defect.
80A3 DP protocol error in Direct-Data-Link-Mapper or User-Interface/User. Could be a
hardware defect.
80B0 SFC not possible for module type
Data record unknown to module
Data record number ≥ 241 is not allowed.
Data records 0 and 1 are not permitted for SFC58 "WR_REC."
80B1 The length specified in the RECORD parameter is wrong.
80B2 The configured slot is not occupied.
80B3 Actual module type is not the module type specified in SDB1.
80C0 RDREC:
The module has record, but it doesn't have any read data.
WRREC:
ASM is not ready to receive new data
– Wait until the cyclic counter has been incremented
80C1 The data of the preceding write job on the module for the same data record have not
yet been processed by the module.
80C2 The module is currently processing the maximum possible number of jobs for a CPU.
80C3 Required resources (memory, etc.) are currently in use.
This error is not reported by the FC/FB 45. If this error occurs, the FC/FB 45 waits
until the system is able to provide resources again.
80C4 Communication error
Parity error
SW ready not set
Error in block length management
Checksum error on CPU side
Checksum error on module side
80C5 Distributed I/O not available
Alarm, error and system messages
11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing)
MOBY D
292 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 293
Troubleshooting/FAQ 12
What shall I do when nothing works?
1. Check the supply voltage directly on the SLG connector with a voltmeter.
2. Check the cables to the computer
– Do the SLG and the computer have the same physical interface?
– Is the polarity of the connecting cable (RS 232) correct?
(RxD of SLG must be connected to TxD of computer and vice-versa)
– Is the cable shield connected correctly?
Error messages
More information on error messages can be found at MOBY D C/C++ MDWAPI
Programming Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/12429971).
The range of the SLG is too small
When the range of the SLG is too small, you must check
● Power supply unit/switched-mode power supply (see the Section
Planning the MOBY D
system
regarding interference)
● Whether monitors or other sources of interference are nearby (see the Section
Planning
the MOBY D system
)
● Whether metal is in the immediate vicinity (see the Section
Planning the MOBY D
system
)
● To achieve optimal write/read distances with ANT D5, a metal plate is required at a
distance of 100 mm (see the Section
Planning the MOBY D system
)
Troubleshooting/FAQ
MOBY D
294 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 295
Certificates and approvals A
Certificate Description
CE Approval to R&TTE
Notes on CE marking
The following applies to the system described in this documentation:
The CE marking on a device is indicative of the corresponding approval:
DIN ISO 9001 certificate
The quality assurance system for the entire product process (development, production, and
marketing) at Siemens fulfills the requirements of ISO 9001 (corresponds to EN29001:
1987).
This has been certified by DQS (the German society for the certification of quality
management systems).
EQ-Net certificate no.: 1323-01
Certificates and approvals
MOBY D
296 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Certificates for USA and Canada
Safety
One of the following markings on a device is indicative of the corresponding approval:
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) per UL 60950 (I.T.E) or per UL 508 (IND.CONT.EQ)
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) according to Canadian standard C22.2 No. 60950
(I.T.E) or C22.2 No. 142 (IND.CONT.EQ)
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) according to standard UL 60950, Report E11 5352 and
Canadian standard C22.2 No. 60950 (I.T.E) or UL508 and C22.2 No. 142
(IND.CONT.EQ)
UL recognition mark
Canadian Standard Association (CSA) per Standard C22.2. No. 60950 (LR 81690) or
per C22.2 No. 142 (LR 63533)
Canadian Standard Association (CSA) per American Standard UL 60950 (LR 81690) or
per UL 508 (LR 63533)
Certificates and approvals
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 297
EMC
USA
Federal Communications
Commission
Radio Frequency
Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely
to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own expense.
Shielded Cables Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance
with FCC regulations.
Modifications Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer
could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Conditions of Operations This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CANADA
Canadian Notice This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Certificates and approvals
MOBY D
298 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 299
Service & Support B
Contact partner
If you have any further questions on the use of our products, please contact one of our
representatives at your local Siemens office.
The addresses are found on the following pages:
● On the Internet (www.siemens.com/automation/partner)
● In Catalog CA 01
● In Catalog FS 10 specially for factory automation sensors
Technical Support
You can access technical support for all IA/DT projects via the following:
● Phone: + 49 (0) 180 5050 222
(€ 0.14 /min. from the German landline network, deviating mobile communications prices
are possible)
● E-mail (mailto:support.automation@siemens.com)
● Internet: Online support request form: (www.siemens.com/automation/support-request)
Service & support for industrial automation and drive technologies
You can find various services on the Support homepage
(www.siemens.com/automation/service&support) of IA/DT on the Internet.
There you will find the following information, for example:
● Our newsletter containing up-to-date information on your products.
● Relevant documentation for your application, which you can access via the search
function in "Product Support".
● A forum for global information exchange by users and specialists.
● Your local contact for IA/DT on site.
● Information about on-site service, repairs, and spare parts. Much more can be found
under "Our service offer".
RFID homepage
For general information about our identification systems, visit RFID homepage
(www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/rf).
Service & Support
MOBY D
300 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Technical documentation on the Internet
A guide to the technical documentation for the various products and systems is available on
the Internet:
SIMATIC Guide manuals (www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal)
Online catalog and ordering system
The online catalog and the online ordering system can also be found on the Industry Mall
Homepage (http://www.siemens.com/industrymall).
Training center
We offer appropriate courses to get you started. Please contact your local training center or
the central training center in
D-90327 Nuremberg.
Phone: +49 (0) 180 523 56 11
(€ 0.14 /min. from the German landline network, deviating mobile communications prices are
possible)
For information about courses, see the SITRAIN homepage (www.sitrain.com).
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 301
Previous versions C
C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB
C.1.1 Compatibility list
The mobile data storage units listed below are replaced by compatible successor products.
The product name does not change, however, the successor products have a new order
number as listed in the table below.
These type designations can also be found on the type plates of the components. You can
use this table to find replacements especially in the case of types that are no longer
available.
Transponder Order No. of previous MDS version Order No. of replacement type
MDS D100 6GT2600-0AD00 6GT2600-0AD10
MDS D124 6GT2600-0AC00 6GT2600-0AC10
MDS D139 6GT2600-0AA00 6GT2600-0AA10
MDS D160 6GT2600 0AB00 6GT2600 0AB10
Previous versions
C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB
MOBY D
302 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
C.1.2 MDS D124 (MLFB 6GT2600-0AC00)
Application area
The MDS D124 is a passive, maintenance-free transponder based on the ISO 15693
standard with I-Code technology. It was designed for applications in production and
distribution logistics as well as product identification.
This mobile data storage unit can also be used in a harsh environment under extreme
environmental conditions (e.g. extreme temperatures).
Figure C-1 MDS D124
Ordering data
Table C- 1 Ordering data for MDS D124
Order no.
Mobile data storage unit MDS D124
Button, 112 byte EEPROM user memory
6GT2600-0AC00
Previous versions
C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 303
Technical data
Table C- 2 Technical data for MDS D124
Memory size 128 bytes
Memory configuration
Serial number
Configuration memory
AFI/DSFID
Application memory
8-byte (fixed code)
6 bytes
2 bytes
112 bytes
Storage technology EEPROM
Memory organization See the Section
Mobile data storage units -
Introduction
Listing to ISO 15693
Data contents (at +40°C) 10 years
MTBF (at +40 °C) ≥ 1.5 x 106 hours
Data transmission rate
Read
Writing
approx. 3,5 ms/byte
approx. 9.5 ms/byte
Read cycles Unlimited
Write cycles, typical 1 000 000
Write cycles, min. 200 000
Write/read distance (Sg) See the Section
Field data
Distance from metal min. 25 mm (approx. 30 % reduction of the field
data)
Multitag capability Yes
Anti-collision speed approx. 20 transponders/s simultaneously
identifiable
Power supply Inductive power transmission
(without battery)
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP67
Shock resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M3
total shock response spectrum, Type II
100 g
Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class
7M3
20 g
Torsion and bending load Not permissible
Dimensions (D x H) in mm 27 x 4
Color Black
Material Epoxy casting resin
Mounting technique Adhesive, M3 screw
Tightening torque at +20 °C ≤ 1 Nm
(at high temperatures, the expansion coefficients of
the materials used must be taken into account)
Previous versions
C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB
MOBY D
304 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-25 to +125°C
-40 to +150°C
Weight, approx. 5 g
Field data
Table C- 3 Field data of MDS D124
SLG D10/D10S
ANT D5
SLG D10/D10S
ANT D6
SLG D10/D10S
ANT D10
SLG D11/D11S
ANT D5
SLG D12/
SLG D12S
Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 130 mm 0 to 130 mm 0 to 130 mm 0 to 70 mm 0 to 50 mm
Limit distance (Sg) 180 mm 180 mm 180 mm 110 mm 70 mm
Transmission window (L) Ø 320 mm 440 mm 980 mm Ø 300 mm 120 mm
Transmission window (W) 128 mm 340 mm 380 mm 120 mm 48 mm
Minimum distance from
MDS to MDS
≥ 0.8 m ≥ 1.2 m ≥ 1.8 m ≥ 0.8 m ≥ 0.3 m
Dimensions (in mm)
s
s
Figure C-2 Dimensions of MDS D124
Previous versions
C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 305
Metal-free area
1RQPHWDO
0HWDO
K!PP
'DWDPHPRU\
Figure C-3 Metal-free area for MDS D124
Note
If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is
possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M3 countersunk head screws). This has no
tangible impact on the range.
When installing in the vicinity of metal, observe the instructions in the Section
Planning the
MOBY D system
.
Previous versions
C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB
MOBY D
306 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
C.1.3 MDS D139 (MLFB 6GT2600-0AA00)
Application area
These reusable, cyclic heat-proof transponders with a limited service life are required for use
in production logistics and in assembly lines subject to high temperatures (up to +200 °C).
The MDS D139 is a passive, maintenance-free transponder with 44 bytes of user memory.
This data storage unit is considerably less expensive than the heat-proof mobile data
storage units available today due to its simple construction (without thermal insulation), but
also due to its lack of complexity.
Figure C-4 MDS D139
Ordering data
Table C- 4 Ordering data for MDS D139
Order No.
Mobile data storage units MDS D139
Heat-proof (r/w) up to +200 °C / +220 °C
with 44 bytes user memory
6GT2600-0AA00
Accessories:
Spacers
6GT2690-0AA00
Previous versions
C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 307
Technical data
Table C- 5 Technical data for MDS D139
Memory size 64 bytes
Memory configuration
Serial number
Configuration memory
Family code/application UID
Application memory
8 bytes (fixed code)
8 bytes
4 bytes
44 bytes
Storage technology EEPROM
Memory organization See the Section
Mobile data storage units -
Introduction
Data retention 10 years
MTBF 2 x 10 6 hours
Read cycles Unlimited
Write cycles
at + 40 °C, typical
at + 70 °C, min.
500 000
10 000
Write/read distance (Sg) See
Field data
Distance from metal min. 30 mm (approx. 30 % reduction of the field data)
Multitag capability Yes
Power supply Inductive power transmission
(without battery)
Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP68
Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7,
Class 7M3
Total shock response spectrum, Type II
50 g
Vibration-resistant according to EN 60721-
3-7, Class 7M3
20 g
Torsion and bending load Not permissible
Enclosure dimensions (D x H) in mm 85 x 15
Color Black
Material Plastic PPS
Mounting 1 x M5 screw 1
Tightening torque 1.5 Nm 2
Previous versions
C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB
MOBY D
308 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-25 °C to
+100 °C
+140 °C
+200 °C 3
+220 °C
-40 °C to +100
°C
permanent
20% reduction in the limit
distance
Tested up to 4,000 hours
or 1,500 cycles
Tested up to 2000 hours
or 500 cycles
Weight, approx. 50 g
1) To prevent damage to the MDS at high temperature (depending on the expansion coefficients), an
M5 stainless steel screw must be used to attach it to the spacer (6GT2690-0AA00).
2) At higher temperatures (>+80 °C), the expansion coefficients of all materials must be observed
3) At temperatures of +140 °C and above, processing is not possible
Field data
Table C- 6 Field data for MDS D139
SLG D10/D10S
ANT D5
SLG D10/D10S
ANT D6
SLG D10/D10S
ANT D10
SLG D11/D11S
ANT D5
SLG D12/
SLG D12S
Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 380 mm 0 to 480 mm 0 to 380 mm 0 to 240 mm 0 to 120 mm
Limit distance (Sg) 450 mm 550 mm 450 mm 300 mm 150 mm
Transmission window (L) Ø 320 mm 520 mm 1000 mm Ø 300 mm 120 mm
Transmission window (W) 128 mm 420 mm 400 mm 120 mm 48 mm
Minimum distance from
MDS to MDS
≥ 1 m ≥ 1.5 m ≥ 2 m ≥ 1 m ≥ 0.5 m
ATEX
The MDS D139 mobile data memory is classed as a piece of simple, electrical equipment
and can be operated in the Category 2G protection zone.
Previous versions
C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 309
Dimensions (in mm)
s
s
s
s
s
s
Figure C-5 Dimensions of MDS D139
Previous versions
C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB
MOBY D
310 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Metal-free area
KุPP
)OXVKPRXQWLQJRIWKH0'6LQPHWDOLVQRWSHUPLWWHG
0RXQWLQJRQPHWDO
'DWDVWRUDJH
XQLW
6SDFHU
0HWDO
PP
Figure C-6 Metal-free area for MDS D139
5HWDLQLQJEROW
6SDFHU
0'6'
Figure C-7 MDS D139: Mounting with a spacer
Note
If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is
possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M5). This has no tangible impact on the
range. It is recommended that a test is performed in critical applications.
When installing in the vicinity of metal, observe the instructions in the Section
Planning the
MOBY D system
.
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 311
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
C.2.1 Compatibility list
The write/read devices with antennas listed below will no longer be available as package.
Only the individual components can be ordered.
The write/read devices can be used compatibly as individual components and their previous
properties have not changed. The product name does not change, the individual SLGs are,
however, still available as basic device with the same order numbers
Order No. of replacement type
Write/read device with ANT D5 Order No.
(discontinued) Basic unit Antenna ANT D5
SLG D10 ANT D5 6GT2601-0AA00 6GT2698-1AA00
SLG D11 ANT D5 6GT2601-0AC00 6GT2698-1AC00
SLG D10S ANT D5 6GT2602-0AA00 6GT2698-2AA00
SLG D11S ANT D5 6GT2602-0AC00 6GT2698-2AC00
6GT2698-5AA00
C.2.2 SLG D10 ANT D5 (MLFB 6GT2601-0AA00)
Application area
SLG D10 ANT D5 is a write/read device in the high-end performance range with a serial
interface and a separate antenna which has been specially designed for warehouses,
logistics and distribution. It is designed for a range of up to 480 mm. The write/read device is
equipped with a serial RS 232 interface (RS 422 interface on request) which supports
communication with the PC or non-Siemens PLCs.
For fast and easy programming, a C library is available to the user that supports the use of
Windows 9x, 2000, NT and XP. SLG D10 ANT D5 has multitag capability.
Figure C-8 Write/read device SLG D10 ANT D5
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
312 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Ordering data
Table C- 7 Ordering data for SLG D10 ANT D5
Product Order No.
Write/read device SLG D10 ANT D5
With RS 232 serial interface for standard PC,
with separate antenna
6GT2601-0AA00
Accessories:
Spacer kit for ANT D5
Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
(100 - 240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A) with 2 m connecting
cable and country-specific plug.
EU
UK
US
Cables and connectors
6GT2690-0AB00
6GT2898-0AA00
6GT2898-0AA10
6GT2898-0AA20
See the Section
Planning the MOBY D
system
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 313
Technical data
Table C- 8 Technical data for SLG D10 ANT D5
Inductive interface to the MDS
Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz
Transponders supported Transponders to ISO 15693 and I-Code1
Serial interface to the user RS 232 (RS 422 on request)
Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit
Data transmission rate 9600 baud to 115.2 Kbaud
(adjustable)
Data backup CRC 16
Transmit power 4 W
Write/read distances SLG - MDS 480 mm typically (see field data)1
Software functions Read, write, initialize MDS, access rights,
multitag
Programming Windows 9x, 2000, NT and XP with 32 bit
DLL available
Multitag Yes
Anti-collision speed approx. 20 labels/s simultaneously
identifiable
Power supply
'&9s
Current consumption
Operation
Inrush current, momentary
0.9 A
2.8 A/50 ms
Cable length, SLG - PC
With RS 232
30 m (depending on data transfer rate)
Antenna cable length 3.60 m (included in scope of supply)
Digital inputs/outputs None
Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm
For antenna
For the electronics
340 x 325 x 38
320 x 145 x 100 without connector
Color
Antenna
SLG housing
Black
Anthracite
Material
Antenna
SLG housing
Plastic ASA
Aluminum
Connectors
Antenna (plugs into SLG)
V24 interface
Power Supply
TNC connector
9-pin Sub-D connector (male)
4-pin M12 connector (male)
SLG fixing 4 x M6 screws
Antenna attachment 4 x M5 screws
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
314 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-20 °C to +55 °C
-25 °C to +70 °C
MTBF
SLG D10
ANT D5
7,5 x 10 4 hours
3.0 x 10 5 hours
Degree of protection to EN 60529
SLG and antenna
IP65 (UL: For indoor use only)
Shock resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2
Total shock response spectrum, Type II
30 g
Vibration compliant with EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Weight, approx.
SLG
Antenna
3500 g
1000 g
Approvals CE
FCC
IC
Harmless to heart pacemakers
UL 60950
1) In order to guarantee optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at the
factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal.
Note
The antenna cable is permanently preassembled. Any modifications made to the cable will
invalidate both the warranty and the CE approval.
FCC information
Siemens MOBY D SLG D10
FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD10
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized
changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 315
IC information
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such
that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population;
consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's website www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
This device has been designed to operate with only the antennas as described in this
manual. Use of further antennas is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The
required antenna impedance is 50 ohms.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Field data
Table C- 9 Field data for SLG D10 ANT D5
Limit distance (Sg) max. 480 mm (dependent on transponder)
Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 400 mm (dependent on transponder)
Length of the transmission window (Ld) 320 mm
Width of the transmission window (W) 128 mm
Min. distance from ANT D5 to ANT D5 ≥ 2 m
Transmission window
6LGHYLHZ
7UDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZ
3ODQYLHZ
0HWDOSODWH
)RU6
DPLQ
WKHWUDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZLVH[WHQGHG
6SDFHUNLW
6
DPLQ
6
DPD[
6
D
/
G
$17'
6
J
6
J
PP
Figure C-9 Transmission window for SLG D10 ANT D5
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
316 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Metal-free area
D
D
D
D
D PP
0HWDO
K PPQRQPHWDOVSDFHU
Figure C-10 Metal-free area for SLG D10 ANT D5
When installing in the vicinity of metal, observe the instructions in the Sectoion
Planning the
MOBY D system
.
Definition of distance D
'LVWDQFH'ุP
'
'
Figure C-11 Distance D: SLG D10 ANT D5
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 317
Dimensions (in mm)
&DEOHNLQNSURWHFWLRQ
IOH[LEOHLQHYHU\GLUHFWLRQ
0LQLPXPEHQGLQJ
UDGLXVPP
&DEOHOHQJWKP
1RWH
7KH6/*PXVWEHJURXQGHGRQJURXQGLQJVFUHZ
9LQWHUIDFH
$QWHQQD
3RZHU6XSSO\
)HUULWH
PD[
PP
ෘ
[
Figure C-12 Dimension drawing for SLG D10 ANT D5
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
318 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Note
In order to guarantee optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at
the factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal.
Spacer kit for MOBY D ANT D5
See the Section
Write/read devices, SLG D10 basic unit
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 319
C.2.3 SLG D11 ANT D5 (MLFB 6GT2601-0AC00)
Application area
SLG D11 ANT D5 is a write/read device in the mid performance range with a serial interface
and a separate antenna which has been specially designed for warehouses, logistics and
distribution. It is designed for a range of up to 380 mm (depending on the label).
The write/read device is equipped with a serial RS 232 interface which supports
communication with the PC or non-Siemens PLCs.
For fast and easy programming, a C library is available to the user that supports the use of
Windows 9x, 2000, NT and XP.
SLG D11 ANT D5 has multitag capability.
Figure C-13 Write/read device SLG D11 ANT D5
Ordering data
Table C- 10 Ordering data for SLG D11 ANT D5
Order no.
SLG D11 ANT D5 write/read device basic unit
with RS 232 serial interface for standard PC,
with separate antenna
6GT2601-0AC00
Accessories:
Spacer kit for ANT D5
Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF
systems (100 - 240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A) with 2 m
connecting cable and country-specific plug.
EU
UK
US
Cables and connectors
6GT2690-0AB00
6GT2898-0AA00
6GT2898-0AA10
6GT2898-0AA20
see Chapter
Planning the MOBY D system
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
320 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Technical data
Table C- 11 Technical data for SLG D11 ANT D5
Inductive interface to the MDS
Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz
Transponders supported Transponders to ISO 15693 and I-Code1
Serial interface to the user RS 232
Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit
Data transmission rate 9600 baud to 38.4 Kbaud (adjustable)
Data backup CRC 16
Transmit power 1 W
Write/read distances
SLG - MDS
380 mm typically (see field data)1
Software functions Read, write, initialize MDS, access rights, multitag
Programming Windows 9x, 2000, NT and XP,
with 32 bit DLL available
Multitag Yes
Anti-collision speed approx. 20 labels/s simultaneously identifiable
Power supply
Rated value
Permitted range
'&9
'&9s8/RQO\
'&99
Current consumption
Operation
Inrush current, momentary
150 mA
600 mA
Cable length, SLG - PC
With RS 232
30 m
Antenna cable length 3.60 m
Digital inputs/outputs None
Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm
For antenna
For the electronics
340 x 325 x 38
160 x 80 x 40 without connector
Color
Antenna
SLG housing
Black
Anthracite
Material
Antenna
SLG housing
Plastic ASA
Plastic PA 12
Connectors
Antenna (plugs into SLG)
V24 interface
Power Supply
TNC connector
9-pin Sub-D connector (male)
4-pin M12 connector (male)
SLG fixing 2 x M5 screws
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 321
Antenna attachment 4 x M5 screws
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-25 °C to +55 °C
-25 °C to +70 °C
MTBF
SLG D11
ANT D5
2.0 x 105 hours
3.0 x 10 5 hours
Degree of protection to EN 60529
SLG and antenna
IP65 (UL: for indoor only)
Shock resistant to EN 60721-3-7
Class 7M2 Total shock response
spectrum, Type II
30 g
Vibration compliant with
EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Weight, approx.
SLG
Antenna
600 g
1000 g
Approvals CE
FCC
IC
Harmless to heart pacemakers
UL 60950
1) In order to guarantee optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at the
factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal.
CAUTION
The antenna cable is permanently preassembled. Any modifications made to the cable will
invalidate both the warranty and the CE approval.
Note
The SLG D11 can process up to 4 MDSes with I-Code 1-Chip (e.g. MDS D139) in multitag
mode!
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
322 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
FCC information
Siemens MOBY D SLG D11
FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD11
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized
changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
IC information
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such
that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population;
consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's website www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
This device has been designed to operate with only the antennas as described in this
manual. Use of further antennas is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The
required antenna impedance is 50 ohms.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Field data
Table C- 12 Field data for SLG D11 ANT D5
Limit distance (Sg) max. 380 mm (dependent on transponder)
Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 300 mm (dependent on transponder)
Length of the transmission window (Ld) 300 mm
Width of the transmission window (W) 120 mm
Min. distance from ANT D5 to ANT D5 ≥ 2 m
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 323
Transmission window
6LGHYLHZ
7UDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZ
3ODQYLHZ
0HWDOSODWH
)RU6
DPLQ
WKHWUDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZLVH[WHQGHG
6SDFHUNLW
6
DPLQ
6
DPD[
6
D
/
G
$17'
6
J
6
J
PP
Figure C-14 Transmission window for SLG D11 ANT D5
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
324 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Metal-free area
D
D
D
D
D PP
0HWDO
K PPQRQPHWDOVSDFHU
Figure C-15 Metal-free area for SLG D11 ANT D5
When installing in the vicinity of metal, observe the instructions in the Section
Planning the
MOBY D system
.
Definition of distance D
'LVWDQFH'ุP
'
'
Figure C-16 Distance D: SLG D11 ANT D5
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 325
Dimensions (in mm)
)HUULWH
PD[
PP
&DEOHNLQNSURWHFWLRQ
IOH[LEOHLQHYHU\GLUHFWLRQ
0LQLPXPEHQGLQJ
UDGLXVPP
&DEOHOHQJWKP
9LHZ$
9LQWHUIDFH
3RZHU6XSSO\
ෘ
$$
[ ෘ
Figure C-17 Dimension drawing for SLG D11 ANT D5
Note
In order to guarantee optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at
the factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal.
Spacer kit for MOBY D ANT D5
See the Section
Write/read devices, SLG D10 basic unit
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
326 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
C.2.4 SLG D10S ANT D5 (6GT2602-0AA00)
Application area
SLG D10S ANT D5 is a write/read device in the high-end performance range with a serial
interface and a separate antenna which has been specially designed for warehouses,
logistics and distribution. It is designed for a range of up to 480 mm. The write/read device is
equipped with a serial RS 422 interface that supports communication to SIMATIC S7 or
PROFIBUS DP-V1 through the interface modules (ASM 452, ASM 456, ASM 473 and
ASM 475).
FC 45 is one method of quick and easy programming available to the user.
With the high degree of protection (IP65) and the use of high-quality materials, the SLG
D10S ANT D5 ensures problem-free operation under the harshest industrial conditions.
Figure C-18 Write/read device SLG D10S ANT D5
Ordering data
Table C- 13 Ordering data for SLG D10S ANT D5
Order No.
Write/read device SLG D10S ANT D5
With a serial RS 422 interface for connection to
ASM 452, ASM 456, ASM 473 and ASM 475,
with a remote antenna
6GT2602-0AA00
Accessories:
Spacer kit for ANT D5
Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF
systems (100 - 240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A) with 2 m
connecting cable and country-specific plug.
EU
UK
US
24 V connecting cable, 5 m in length
Cables and connectors
6GT2690-0AB00
6GT2898-0AA00
6GT2898-0AA10
6GT2898-0AA20
6GT2491-1HH50
See the Section
Planning the MOBY D
system
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 327
Technical data
Table C- 14 Technical data for SLG D10S ANT D5
Inductive interface to the MDS
Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz
Transponders supported Transponders according to ISO 15693 and I-
Code1
Serial interface to the user RS 422
Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit
Data transmission rate 19.2 Kbaud to 115.2 Kbaud
(depending on ASM)
Data backup CRC 16
Transmit power 4 W
Write/read distances for SLG 450 mm typically (see field data)1
Software functions Read, write, initialize MDS
The Repeat command is not permissible.
A buffer of up to 256 bytes is available in the SLG
for concatenating commands For one command,
therefore, it is only possible to combine
commands until the sum of the header and user
data of the individual message frames does not
exceed this value. FC 45 limits the user data
length for each individual message frame to 233
bytes.
Programming FC 45
Transmission protocol 3964R
Multitag Available soon
Power supply
'&9s
Current consumption
Operation
Inrush current, momentary
0.9 A
2.8 A/50 ms
Cable length for SLG S7
With RS 422
300 m
Antenna cable length 3.60 m (included in scope of supply)
Digital inputs/outputs None
Enclosure dimensions (L x W x H) in mm
For antenna
For the electronics
340 x 325 x 38
320 x 145 x 100 (without connector)
Color
Antenna
SLG housing
Black
Anthracite
Material
Antenna
SLG housing
Plastic ASA
Aluminum
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
328 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Connector
Antenna (plugs into SLG)
RS 422 interface
Power supply
TNC connector
9-pin Sub-D connector (male)
4-pin M12 connector (male)
SLG fixing 4 x M6 screws
Antenna attachment 4 x M5 screws
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-20 °C to +55 °C
-25 °C to +70 °C
MTBF
SLG D10S
ANT D5
7.5 x 10 4 hours
3.0 x 10 5 hours
Degree of protection according to EN 60529
SLG and antenna
IP65 (UL: for indoor use only)
Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7
Class 7M2
Total shock response spectrum Type II
30 g
Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Weight, approx.
SLG
Antenna
3500 g
1000 g
Approvals CE
FCC
IC
Harmless to heart pacemakers
UL 60950
1) In order to ensure optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at the
factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal.
CAUTION
The antenna cable is permanently preassembled. Any modifications made to the cable will
invalidate both the warranty and the CE approval.
Note
After detaching the ANT D5 antenna from the SLG and connecting it again (by screwing), an
init_run must always be performed.
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 329
FCC information
Siemens MOBY D SLG D10S
FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD10
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized
changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
IC information
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such
that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population;
consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's website www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
This device has been designed to operate with only the antennas as described in this
manual. Use of further antennas is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The
required antenna impedance is 50 ohms.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Field data
Table C- 15 Field data for SLG D10S ANT D5
Limit distance (Sg) max. 480 mm (dependent on transponder)
Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 400 mm (dependent on transponder)
Length of the transmission window (Ld) 320 mm
Width of transmission window (W) 128 mm
Min. distance from ANT D5 to ANT D5 ≥ 2 m
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
330 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Transmission window
6LGHYLHZ
7UDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZ
3ODQYLHZ
0HWDOSODWH
)RU6
DPLQ
WKHWUDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZLVH[WHQGHG
6SDFHUNLW
6
DPLQ
6
DPD[
6
D
/
G
$17'
6
J
6
J
PP
Figure C-19 Transmission window for SLG D10S ANT D5
Metal-free area
D
D
D
D
D PP
0HWDO
K PPQRQPHWDOVSDFHU
Figure C-20 Metal-free area for SLG D10S ANT D5
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 331
When installing in the vicinity of metal, observe the instructions in the Section
Planning the
MOBY D system
.
Definition of distance D
'LVWDQFH'ุP
'
'
Figure C-21 Distance D: SLG D10S ANT D5
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
332 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Dimensions (in mm)
&DEOHNLQNSURWHFWLRQ
IOH[LEOHLQHYHU\GLUHFWLRQ
0LQLPXPEHQGLQJ
UDGLXVPP
&DEOHOHQJWKP
1RWH
7KH6/*PXVWEHJURXQGHGRQJURXQGLQJVFUHZ
9LQWHUIDFH
$QWHQQD
3RZHU6XSSO\
)HUULWH
PD[
PP
ෘ
[
Figure C-22 Dimension drawing for SLG D10S ANT D5
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 333
Note
In order to guarantee optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at
the factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal.
Spacer kit for MOBY D ANT D5
See the Section
Write/read devices, SLG D10 basic unit
C.2.5 SLG D11S ANT D5 (6GT2602-0AC00)
Application area
SLG D11S ANT D5 is a write/read device in the mid performance range with a serial
interface and a separate antenna which has been specially designed for warehouses,
logistics and distribution. It is designed for a range of up to 380 mm (depending on the label).
The write/read device is equipped with a serial RS 422 interface that supports
communication to SIMATIC S7 or PROFIBUS DP-V1 through the interface modules
(ASM 452, ASM 456, ASM 473 and ASM 475).
FC 45 is one method of quick and easy programming available to the user. The rugged
housing and high degree of protection (IP65) permit use even under the toughest industrial
conditions.
Figure C-23 Write/read device SLG D11S ANT D5
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
334 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Ordering data
Table C- 16 Ordering data for SLG D11S ANT D5
Order
Write/read device SLG D11S ANT D5
With a serial RS 422 interface for connection to
ASM 452, ASM 456, ASM 473 and ASM 475,
with a remote antenna
6GT2602-0AC00
Accessories:
Spacer kit for ANT D5
Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems
(100 - 240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A) with 2 m connecting
cable and country-specific plug.
EU
UK
US
24 V connecting cable, 5 m in length
Cables and connectors
6GT2690-0AB00
6GT2898-0AA00
6GT2898-0AA10
6GT2898-0AA20
6GT 491-1HH50
See the Section
Planning the MOBY D
system
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 335
Technical data
Table C- 17 Technical data for SLG D11S ANT D5
Inductive interface to the MDS
Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz
Transponders supported Transponders to ISO 15693 and I-Code1
Serial interface to the user RS 422
Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit
Data transmission rate 19.2 Kbaud
Data backup CRC 16
Transmit power 1 W (reset parameter 04 hex)
Write/read distances SLG - MDS 380 mm typically (see field data)1
Software functions Read, write and initialize MDS
Concatenated commands are not permitted.
The Repeat command is not implemented.
The largest possible useful data length in a command is 233
bytes.
Programming FC 45
Transmission protocol 3964R
Multitag no
Power supply
Operation
Permitted range
'&9
'&9s8/RQO\
'&99
Current consumption
Operation
Inrush current, momentary
150 mA
600 mA
Cable length SLG – SIMATIC S7
With RS 422
300 m
Antenna cable length 3.60 m (included in scope of supply)
Digital inputs/outputs None
Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm
For antenna
For the electronics
340 x 325 x 38
160 x 80 x 40 without connector
Color
Antenna
SLG housing
Black
Anthracite
Material
Antenna
SLG housing
Plastic ASA
Plastic PA 12
Connectors
Antenna (plugs into SLG)
RS-422 interface
Power Supply
TNC connector
9-pin Sub-D connector (male)
4-pin M12 connector (male)
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
336 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
SLG fixing 2 x M5 screws
Antenna attachment 4 x M5 screws
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
-25 to +55°C
-25 to +70°C
MTBF
SLG D11S
ANT D5
2.0 x 105 hours
3.0 x 10 5 hours
Degree of protection to EN 60529
SLG and antenna
IP65 (UL: For indoor use only)
Shock resistant to EN 60721-3-7,
Class 7M2
Total shock response spectrum,
Type II
30 g
Vibration compliant with EN 60721-
3-7, Class 7M2
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Weight, approx.
SLG
Antenna
600 g
1000 g
Approvals CE
FCC
IC
Harmless to heart pacemakers
UL 60950
1) In order to guarantee optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at the
factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal.
FCC information
Siemens MOBY D SLG D11S
FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD11
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized
changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 337
IC information
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such
that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population;
consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's website www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
This device has been designed to operate with only the antennas as described in this
manual. Use of further antennas is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The
required antenna impedance is 50 ohms.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Field data
Table C- 18 Field data for SLG D11S ANT D5
Limit distance (Sg) max. 380 mm (dependent on transponder)
Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 300 mm (dependent on transponder)
Length of the transmission window (Ld) 300 mm
Width of the transmission window (W) 120 mm
Min. distance from ANT D5 to ANT D5 ≥ 2 m
Transmission window
6LGHYLHZ
7UDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZ
3ODQYLHZ
0HWDOSODWH
)RU6
DPLQ
WKHWUDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZLVH[WHQGHG
6SDFHUNLW
6
DPLQ
6
DPD[
6
D
/
G
$17'
6
J
6
J
PP
Figure C-24 Transmission window for SLG D11S ANT D5
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
338 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Metal-free area
D
D
D
D
D PP
0HWDO
K PPQRQPHWDOVSDFHU
Figure C-25 Metal-free area for SLG D11S ANT D5
When installing in the vicinity of metal, observe the instructions in the Section
Planning the
MOBY D system
.
Definition of distance D
'LVWDQFH'ุP
'
'
Figure C-26 Distance D: SLG D11S ANT D5
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 339
Dimensions (in mm)
)HUULWH
PD[
PP
&DEOHNLQNSURWHFWLRQ
IOH[LEOHLQHYHU\GLUHFWLRQ
0LQLPXPEHQGLQJ
UDGLXVPP
&DEOHOHQJWKP
9LHZ$
9LQWHUIDFH
3RZHU6XSSO\
ෘ
$$
[ ෘ
Figure C-27 Dimension drawing for SLG D11S ANT D5
Note
In order to guarantee optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at
the factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal.
Previous versions
C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5
MOBY D
340 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Spacer kit for MOBY D ANT D5
See Section
SLG D10 basic unit
,
spacer kit for MOBY D ANT D5.
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 341
List of abbreviations D
CE
Communauté Européenne: CE mark
FCC
Federal Communications Commission
IC
Industry Canada
Lx
Field length in X direction
Ly
Field length in Y direction
MDS
Mobile data storage units
SLG
Read/write device
STG
Service and test unit
ASM
Interface module
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
List of abbreviations
MOBY D
342 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
VDE
Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker [Association of German Electrical Engineers]
RFID
Radio Frequency Identification Devices
UL
Underwriter Laboratories, USA
CSA
Canadian Standard Association
EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility
FB
Function block
FC
Function
Sa
Operating distance between MDS and SLG
Sg
Limit distance
L
Length of a transmission window
CP
Intersection of the axes of symmetry of the MDS
UID
Unique Identification. A serial number which identifies the transponder uniquely.
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 343
Glossary
Active field
Area with minimum field strength containing the transmission window, as well as the areas in
which the field strength is no longer sufficient for data exchange.
Active surface
See active field
Automation system (AS)
A programmable logical controller (PLC) of the SIMATIC S7 system, comprising a central
controller, a CPU and various I/O modules.
Byte
A group of bits, normally eight
CE Label
Communauté Européenne (product mark of the European Union)
Communication modules
Communication modules are used to integrate the MOBY identification systems in SIMATIC
or SINUMERIK systems, or to connect them to PROFIBUS DP, PC or any other system.
Once supplied with the corresponding parameters and data, they handle data
communication. They then make the corresponding results and data available. Suitable
software blocks (FB/FC for SIMATIC; C libraries for PCs with Windows Professional) ensure
easy and fast integration in the application.
Data transmission rate
Unit of measurement for the volume of data transmitted within a unit of time, e.g. bytes/s
Dwell time
The dwell time is the time in which the transponder dwells within the transmission window of
a write/read device. The write/read device can exchange data with the transponder during
this time.
Glossary
MOBY D
344 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Dynamic mode
In dynamic mode, the data carrier moves past the write/read device at a traversing rate
which depends on the configuration. Various checking mechanisms (CRC, etc.) ensure
error-free data transfer even under extreme environmental conditions. A serial connection
(up to 300 m) is used to connect the write/read device directly to an interface module, PC, or
any other system.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of an electrical or electronic device to operate
satisfactorily in an electromagnetic environment without affecting or interfering with the
environment over and above certain limits.
EMC directive
Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility This guideline relates to any electrical or
electronic equipment, plant or system containing electric or electronic components.
Equipotential bonding
Potential differences between different parts of a plant can arise due to the different design
of the plant components and different voltage levels. It is necessary to compensate for these
differences by equipotential bonding. this is done by combining the equipotential bonding
conductors of power components and non-power components on a centralized equalizing
conductor.
ESD directive
Directive for handling ESDs.
Interface modules (ASM)
See communication modules
Limit distance
The limit distance is the maximum clear distance between the upper surface of the write/read
device and the transponder, at which the transmission can still function under normal
conditions.
Metal-free area
Distance/area which must be maintained between the transponder and metal in order to
prevent interference during data transfer between the transponder and write/read device.
Mobile data storage units (MDS)
See transponder
Glossary
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 345
Multi-tag capability
Multi-tag capability means that a write/read device can communicate simultaneously with
different data carriers.
Programmable logic controller (PLC)
The programmable logical controllers (PLC) of the SIMATIC S5 system consist of a central
controller, one or more CPUs, and various other modules (e.g. I/O modules).
Reader/writer
See write/read device
Readers
Readers ensure fast, secure data transfer between mobile data storage units and higher-
level systems (PLCs, PCs, etc.). The data, energy included, are transmitted inductively
across an electromagnetic alternating field or by radio. This principle enables contact-free
data transmission, ensures high industrial compatibility and works reliably in the presence of
contamination or through non-metallic materials.
RFID systems
SIMATIC RF identification systems control and optimize material flow and production
sequences. They identify reliably, quickly and economically, use non-contact data
communication technology, and store data directly on the product. They are also resistant to
contamination.
Secondary fields
The strength of the secondary fields, which exist in addition to the transmission window, is
usually lower than that of the transmission window and depends on the metallic environment.
Secondary fields should not be used in configuring.
Static mode
In static mode the transponder is positioned at a fixed distance (maximum: limit distance)
exactly above the write/read device.
Transmission distance
Distance between write/read device/antenna and transponder (mobile data storage unit)
Transmission window
Area in which reliable data exchange between transponder and write/read device is possible
due to a particular minimum field strength.
Glossary
MOBY D
346 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
Transponder
An invented word from transmitter and responder. Transponders are used on the product,
the product carrier, the object, or its transport or packaging unit, and contain production and
manufacturing data, i.e. all application-specific data. They follow the product through
assembly lines, transfer and production lines and are used to control material flow.
Because of their wireless design, transponders can be used, if necessary, at individual work
locations or manufacturing stations, where their data can be read and updated.
Write/read devices (SLG)
See readers
Write/read distance
See transmission distance
MOBY D
System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 347
Index
A
ANT connecting cable
Antenna connecting cable, 93
ANT D10
Definition of distance D, 214
Dimensions, 228
Technical data, 211
Transmission window, 225
ANT D5
Definition of distance D, 214
Technical data, 206, 211
ANT D6
Definition of distance D, 221
Technical data, 206, 211
Antenna duplexer, 277
Antenna extension cable, 93
Approvals, 295
ASM 452
Dimensions, 240
Operating mode, 233
Ordering data, 241
Pin assignments, 237
PROFIBUS DP address and terminating
resistor, 234
PROFIBUS DP configuring, 233
Reader connection system, 235
Technical data, 239
ASM 473
Design and function, 243
Dimensions, 251
Hardware configuration, 246
Ordering data, 252
Pin assignments, 248
Reader connection system, 247
Technical data, 250
ASM 475
Assignment for connecting cable, 259
Configuration, 255
Design and function, 253
Indicator elements, 257
Ordering data, 262
Pin assignment, 259
Reader connection system, 258
Technical data, 261
wiring, 255
C
Cabinet configuration, 75
Cable
Shielding, 81
Cable configuration, 85
Certificates, 295
Communication
with the SLG, 30
Contact partner, 299
Coupling paths, 74
Courses, 300
E
Electromagnetic compatibility
Coupling paths, 74
Electromagnetic interference, 71
EMC Guidelines, 297
Avoiding interference, 78
Basic Rules, 70
Cabinet configuration, 75
Cable shielding, 81
Definition, 69
Equipotential bonding, 79
Overview, 68
Propagation of electromagnetic interference, 71
Equipotential bonding, 79
F
Field data, 33
Fixing pocket
for MDS D100, 101
I
Interference sources
Electromagnetic, 72
L
LEDs
For MOBY, 248
for PROFIBUS DP, 248
Index
MOBY D
348 System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618
M
MDS
Memory division, 97
MDS D124
Dimensions, 304
Field data, 304
Metal-free area, 305
Ordering data, 302
Technical data, 303
MDS D139
Dimensions, 309
Field data, 308
Metal-free area, 310
Ordering data, 306
Technical data, 307
Metal-free area, 40
Flush-mounting, 41
Mounting on metal, 41
MOBY antenna distributor
Design and function, 277
Ordering data, 277
Technical data, 278
O
Ordering data
SLG D11, 157
SLG D11 accessories, 157
P
Pin assignment
SLG D1x (RS 232), 86
SLG D1xS (RS 422), 88
S
Shield concept, 83
Shielding, 81
SLG D10 ANT D5
Definition of distance D, 316
Field data, 315
Metal-free area, 316
Ordering data, 312
Programming, 151
Technical data, 313
Transmission window, 315
SLG D10 basic unit
Dimensions, 156
Technical data, 154
SLG D10S ANT D5
Definition of distance D, 331
Dimensions, 332
Field data, 329
Metal-free area, 330
Ordering data, 326
Technical data, 327
Transmission window, 330
SLG D10S basic unit
Dimensions, 178
Technical data, 176
SLG D11 ANT D5
Definition of distance D, 324
Dimensions, 325
Field data, 322
Metal-free area, 324
Ordering data, 319
Programming, 151
Technical data, 320
Transmission window, 323
SLG D11S ANT D5
Definition of distance D, 338
Dimensions, 339
Field data, 337
Metal-free area, 338
Ordering data, 334
Technical data, 335
Transmission window, 337
SLG D12
Definition of distance D, 168
Programming, 151
SLG D12S
Definition of distance D, 192
Spacers, 102
T
Technical documentation
On the Internet, 300
Technical Support, 299
Tracking
Tolerance, 27
Tracking tolerance, 27
Training, 300
Transmission window, 25
Impact of metal, 80
Reduction of interference due to metal, 51
Width, 27
Transponder
Directions of motion, 29
www.siemens.com/automation
subject to change
J31069-D0147-A6-7618
© Siemens AG 2010
SIEMENS AG
Industry Sector
Sensors and Communication
Postfach 4848
90026 NÜRNBERG
DEUTSCHLAND
www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors
Get more Information
